Sie sind auf Seite 1von 628

HS-50A

MAINTENANCE MANUAL
Safety manual for persons qualified for maintenance

Sicherheitsvorschrift Für qualifiziertes Wartungspersonal

Manuel de sûreté pour des personnes qualifiées pour la


maintenance

Wire E.D.M

Wire Electrical Discharge Maschine

La machine d'etincelage par fil

HS-50A

Please read this safety manual carefully before operating the wire electrical
discharge machine.

Lesen Sie bitte aufmerksam diese Sicherheitsvorschrift, bevor Sie die Wire
Electrical Discharge Maschine benutzen.

Lisez ce manuel de sûretésoigneusement avant l'opération de la machine


d'etincelage par fil,s'il vous plaît.

Brother Industries, Ltd. Machine Tools Div.


1999-08-10 MO 89 HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
-1-
Inhalt

Inhalt

Was ist die Sicherheitsvorschrift? ...................... 5


Bitte lesen Sie! ............................................................................................... 5
Zweck ............................................................................................................ 6
Zusammenstellung der Sicherheitsvorschriften und der Zusammenhang mit anderen Manuals .................... 7
Beziehung mit Sicherheitsschildern ............................................................ 10
Sprache ........................................................................................................ 11
Kundendienst ............................................................................................... 12
Handhabung der Sicherheitsvorschrift ........................................................ 13
Gefahrenstufe .............................................................................................. 14
Reihenfolge der Erklärung .......................................................................... 16
Bedeutung der Bildzeichen ......................................................................... 17

Namen jedes Teils ........................................... 23


Warnungen und Preventivmaßnahmen .............. 27
Prüfen der Sicherheitsschilder .......................... 65

1999-08-10 MO 89 HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6


-3-
Table des matiéres

Table des matiéres

Les grandes lignes du manuel de sûreté .............. 5


Lisez ce manuel ............................................................................................. 5
Intension ........................................................................................................ 6
Le contenu de manuel de sûreté et la relation avec les autres manuels ......................... 7
Relation à des instructions de sûreté ........................................................... 10
Langage ....................................................................................................... 11
Comment d'acheter ...................................................................................... 12
Maniement du manuel de sûreté .................................................................. 13
Degré de danger ........................................................................................... 14
Ordre d'explication ...................................................................................... 16
Significations des symboles ........................................................................ 17

Noms de sections............................................. 23
Avertissements et mesures préventives ............... 27
Vérification des instructions de sûreté............... 65

1999-08-10 MO 89 HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6


-4-
Les grandes lignes du manuel de sûreté

Outline of the safety manual


Read this manual
All people who use the wire electrical discharge machine(hereafter referred to as WEDM), including those who
install the WEDM at the factory, who process materials by operating the WEDM, who adjust and repair the
WEDM, are requested to read this safety manual.
In this safety manual, all people who use theWEDM are expressed as the user.

Was ist die Sicherheitsvorschrift?


Bitte lesen Sie!
Alle Leute, die die Wire Electrical Discharge Machine(WEDM bezeichnet) benutzen, einschließlich der Leute,
die die WEDM in einer Fabrik installieren, die mit der WEDM arbeiten, und die die WEDM warten oder
reparieren, sind aufgefordert, diese Sicherheitsvorschrift zu lesen.
In der Sicherheitsvorschrift werden alle Leute, die die WEDM benutzen, als Benutzer bezeichnet.

Les grandes lignes du manuel de sûreté

Lisez ce manuel
Tout le monde qui utilize la machine d'etincelage par fil, y compris eux qui installent la machine d'etincelage par fil
dans l'usine, qui manient la machine d'etincelage par fil et façonnent des pièces en travail, qui ajustent et réparent la
machine d'etincelage par fil, est requis de lire ce manuel de sûreté.
Dans ce manuel de sûreté, tout le monde qui utilise la machine d'etincelage par fil s'exprime comme utilisateur.

1998-8-27
-5- MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Outline of the safety manual Was ist die Sicherheitsvorschrift?
Purpose
The WEDM consists of high voltage electric circuits and a moving table.. Therefore, various hazards are associated
with operating the machine.
The purpose of this safety manual is to protect users from these hazards.
Therefore, the safety manual explains the following:
Warnings: types of hazards
Preventive measure: ways to prevent any hazards from occurring

Zweck
Die WEDM ist eine Hochspannungsstrommaschine mit einem beweglichen Tisch. Deshalb bestehen verschiedene
Gefahren bei der Benutzung dieser Maschine.
Der Zweck dieser Sicherheitsvorschrift ist es, vor Gefahren die Benutzer zu schützen. In der Sicherheitsvorschrift wird
Folgendes erklärt:
Warnung: Welche Gefahren bestehen?
Preventivmaßnahme: Wie kann man die Gefahren vermeiden?

Intension
La machine d'etincelage par fil consiste en circuits électriques de haute tension et en table mobile.Donc,des hasards
divers s'associent à la machine.
L'intension de ce manuel de sûreté est de protéger les utilisateurs contre ces hasards.
Le manuel de sûreté explique ci-dessous:
Avertissments: des types de hasards
Mesures préventives : des manières d'empêcher les hasards de surgir

1998-8-27
-6- MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Les grandes lignes du manuel de sûreté

Contents of Safety Manual and Relationship with Other Manuals


Each instruction manual, other than the programming manual, includes a safety manual. Safety manuals are given to
each respective personnel group.
Please read the main text of the instruction manual for machine functions and operation methods.
1.Operation manual

Japanese part code : 690794001


English part code : 690800001

Jedem Manual (außer der Programmierungsanleitung) ist eine Sicherheitsvorschrift für die betreffenden Benutzer
beigelegt.
Für die verschiedenen Funktionen oder das Betriebsverfahren der Maschine lesen Sie bitte das entsprechende Manual.
1.Betriebsanleitung

Japanischer Teil-Code : 690794001


Englischer Teil-Code : 690800001

Le contenu de manuel de süreté et la relation avec les autres manuels


Chaque manuel d’instruction, sauf le manuel de programmation, contient le manuel de süreté.
Les manuels de süreté sont donnés à chaque groupe de personnel.
Lisez le texte du manuel d’instruction pour connaître des fonctions et des méthodes d’opération de la machine.
1.Manuel de opération

Code de parties pour japonais : 690794001


Code de parties pour anglais : 690800001

1998-8-27
-7- MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Outline of the safety manual Was ist die Sicherheitsvorschrift?

2.Instruction manual

Japanese part code : 690792001


English part code : 690796001

2.Betriebsanleitung

Japanischer Teil-Code : 690792001


Englischer Teil-Code : 690796001

2.Manuel d'instruction

Code de parties pour japonais : 690792001


Code de parties pour anglais : 690796001

1998-8-27
-8- MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Les grandes lignes du manuel de sûreté
3.Programming manual

Japanese part code : 690802001


English part code : 690804001

4.Maintenance manual

The maintenance manual is not distributed to customers.

3.Programmierungsanleitung

Japanischer Teil-Code : 690802001


Englischer Teil-Code : 690804001

4.Wartungsvorschrift

Die Wartungsvorschrift wird an die Kunden nicht verteilt.

3.Manuel de programmation

Code de parties pour japonais : 690802001


Code de parties pour anglais : 690804001

4.Manuel de maintenance

Le manuel de maintenance n'est pas distribué aux clients.

1998-8-27
-9- MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Outline of the safety manual Was ist die Sicherheitsvorschrift?

Relationship to safety labels


Items of particular importance that appear in this safety manual are also attached to the machine as safety labels.
An explanation of the safety labels is provided at the end of this safety manual. If any safety labels have peeled off
the machine, obtain new safety labels and attach them correctly.

Beziehung mit Sicherheitsschildern


Die wichtigsten Vorschriften der Sicherheitsvorschriften sind in Form von Sicherheitsschild an der Maschine
angebracht.
Eine Erklärung für die Sicherheitsschilder gibt es am Ende der Sicherheitsvorschrift. Falls sich die Sicherheitsschilder
von der Maschine lösen sollten, informieren Sie uns. Wir schicken Ihnen sofort Ersatzschilder zu.

Relation à des instructions de sûreté


Les articles d'importance particulier qui apparaissent dans ce manuel de sûreté s'attachent aussi à la machine comme
instructions de sûreté.
Une explication des instructions de sûreté se prépare à la fin de ce manuel de sûreté. Si des instructions de sûreté se
sont détachées de la machine, obtenez des nouvelles instructions de sûreté et les attachez correctement.

1998-8-27
-10- MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Les grandes lignes du manuel de sûreté

Language
Machines shipped domestically within Japan are provided with safety manuals and safety labels written in Japanese.
Machines shipped abroad from Japan are provided with safety manuals and safety labels written in three languages:
English, German, and French.
For manuals and labels in other languages, consult the dealer from which you purchased the machine.

Sprache
Die Maschinen für den japanischen Markt werden mit den Sicherheitsvorschriften und den Sicherheitsschildern auf
japanisch ausgestaltet. Die im Ausland vertriebenen Maschinen werden mit den Sicherheitsvorschriften und den
Sicherheitsschildern dreisprachig; Englisch, Deutsch und Französisch, ausgestaltet.
Fordern Sie deshalb die für Sie entsprechenden Vorschriften und Schilder, einschließlich dieser in anderen Sprachen, bei
Ihrem Händler an.

Langage
Des machine envoyées à l'intérieur du Japon sont pourvues de manuels de sûreté et d'instructions de sûreté écrits en
japoinais. Des machines envoyées à l'étranger du Japon sont pourvues de manuels de sûreté et d'instructions de sûreté
écrits en trois langages: anglais, allemand, et français. Obtenez les manuels et les instructions écrits en un langage que
vous pouvez comprendre.
Sur manuels et instructions en autres langages, consultez le vendeur auquel vous avez acheté la machine.

1998-8-27
-11- MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Outline of the safety manual Was ist die Sicherheitsvorschrift?

Purchasing
When the safety manuals or safety labels have been lost, obtain these items from the dealer you have purchased the
machinefrom.
If you do not know of a dealer, consult the offices specified below.

1-1-1 Kawagishi, Mizuho-ku, Nagoya 467-8562, JAPAN


BROTHER INDUSTRIES, LTD. MACHINE TOOLS DIV.
phone+81-52-824-2232
fax+81-52-811-0469

Kundendienst
Sollten die Sicherheitsvorschriften oder die Sicherheitsschilder verloren gehen, bekommen Sie diese bei Ihrem Händler.

Wenn Sie Ihren Händler nicht kennen sollten, rufen Sie beim nachfolgenden Büro an.

1-1-1 Kawagishi, Mizuho-ku, Nagoya 467-8562, JAPAN


BROTHER INDUSTRIES, LTD. MACHINE TOOLS DIV.
phone+81-52-824-2232
fax+81-52-811-0469

Comment d'acheter
Quand les manuels de sûreté et les instructions de sûreté ont été perdus, obtenez-les du vendeur auquel vous avez
acheté la machine.
Si vous ne savez pas le vendeur, consultez les bureaux spécifiés ci-dessous.

1-1-1 Kawagishi, Mizuho-ku, Nagoya 467-8562, JAPAN


BROTHER INDUSTRIES, LTD. MACHINE TOOLS DIV.
phone+81-52-824-2232
fax+81-52-811-0469

1998-8-27
-12- MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Les grandes lignes du manuel de sûreté

Handling the safety manual


Be careful not to lose the safety manuals, and keep them handy at all times.
Also, when the machine changes hands, pass the manuals to the new owner together with the machine.

Handhabung der Sicherheitsvorschrift


Geben Sie acht, daßSie die Sicherheitsvorschriften nicht verlieren, und bewahren Sie diese immer griffbereit auf.
Sollte die Maschine den Besitzer wechseln, dann müssen auch die Sicherheitsvorschriften an den neuen Besitzer
zusammen mit der Maschine übergeben werden.

Maniement du manuel de sûreté


Gardez-vous de perdre les manuels de sûreté, et mettez-les sous la main toujours. Quand la machine change de main,
passez les manuels de sûreté à la nouvelle propriétaire avec la machine.

1998-8-27
-13- MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Outline of the safety manual Was ist die Sicherheitsvorschrift?

Explanation order
The safety instructions are explained in the following order:
1. Signal words (DANGER, WARNING, CAUTION) and symbols indicating the degree of danger
2. Type of danger (Subject)
3. Type of predicted damages
4. Preventive measure

Reihenfolge der Erklärung


Hier wird Folgendes erklärt:
1. Stichwörter (GEFAHR, WARNUNG, ACHTUNG), die die Gefahren anzeigen, und Bildzeichen
2. Gefahrengruppe
3. Möglicher Verletzungsgrad
4. Preventivmßnahme

Ordre d'explication
Les instructions de sûreté s'expliquent dans l'ordre ci-dessous.
1 Mots de signal (DANGER, AVERTISSEMENT, ATTENTION) et symboles indiquant le degré de danger
2 Type de danger (Sujet)
3 Type de dommages prévus
4 Mesure préventive

1998-8-27
-16- MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Les grandes lignes du manuel de sûreté

Meaning of symbols
Symbols are used on the safety labels and in the warnings in the safety manual to intuitively explain possible dangers.

1. Hazard

Slippery Moving parts

Bedeutung der Bildzeichen


Auf den Sicherheitsschildern und in den Sicherheitsvorschriften werden die Gefahren und deren Preventivmaßnahmen
mit Bildzeichen anschaulich erklärt. Hier wird ihre Bedeutung erklärt.
1. Gefahr

Rutschen Laufender Teil

Significations des symboles


Les symboles sont utilisés sur les instructions de sûreté et dans les avertissements du manuel de sûreté pour expliquer
des dangers possibles et leurs mesures préventives.
1. Danger

Glissement Parties se mouvant

1998-8-27
-17- MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Outline of the safety manual Was ist die Sicherheitsvorschrift?

Caught Electricshock

Electricshock High temperature

High temperature Hand pinched

Hineingezogen Stromschlag

Stromschlag Heiß

Heiß Hand geklemmt

Pris Commotionélectrique

Commotionélectrique Température haute

Température haute Main coincée

1998-8-27
-18- MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Les grandes lignes du manuel de sûreté

Falling object Cut

Falling object Burst

Fall Falling object

Fallender Gegenstand Sich schneiden

Fallender Gegenstand Explosion

Sturz Fallender Gegenstand

Objet tombant Coupe

Objet tombant Eclatement

Tomber Objet tombant

1998-8-27
-19- MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Outline of the safety manual Was ist die Sicherheitsvorschrift?

Splash Fire

Sharp point

Spritzen Feuer

Sich stechen

Jaillissement Feu

Pointe aiguë

1998-8-27
-20- MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Les grandes lignes du manuel de sûreté

2. Preventive measures

Protect ears. Protect hands.

Protect feet. Remove power plug.

2. Preventivmaßnahmen

Ohren schützen Hände schützen

Füße schützen Netzstecker abziehen

2. Mesures préventives

Protégez vos oreilles. Protégez vos mains.

Protégez vos pieds. Coupez la prise de courant.

1998-8-27
-21- MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Outline of the safety manual Was ist die Sicherheitsvorschrift?

Connect grounding cable. Protect head.

Do not touch. Do not disassemble.

Protect eyes.

Erden Kopf schützen

Nicht berühren Nicht zerlegen

Augen schützen

Connectez le coupe-circuit. Protégez votre tête.

Ne touchez pas. Ne Désassemblez pas.

Protégez vos yeux.

1998-8-27
-22- MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

Warnings and preventive measures


The numbers in ( ) such as 1, 2 correspond to the names of each part.

Danger
! DANGER

MD1 Various hazards are associated with the WEDM.


MD1-1 Read the safety manual before operating the machine to understand
these hazards and preventive measures.
MD1-2 All users must know the position of the emergency stop (8) switch and
its operation.

Warnungen und Preventivmaßnahmen


Jede Zahl in Klammern wie (1)(2) entspricht der Nummer der Namen jedes Teils.

Gefahr
! GEFAHR

MD1 In der WEDM bestehen verschiedene Gefahren.


MD1-1 Vor Inbetriebnahme der Maschine die Sicherheitsvorschrift lesen,um
die Risiken zu erkennen und die Preventivmaßnahmen zu verstehen.
MD1-2 Alle Benutzer müssen wissen, wo der Notfall-stop-Schalter(8) ist, und
wie er benutzt wird.

Avertissements et mesures préventives


Les nombres dans ( ) tels que 1, 2 correspondent aux noms de chaque section.

Danger
! DANGER

MD1 L'utilisation de la machine d'etincelage par fil comporte des risques.


MD1-1 Lisez le manuel de sûreté avant l'opération de la machine pour
connaître ces hasards et les mesures préventives.
MD1-2 Tous les utilisateurs doivent connaître la position du bouton d'arrêt
d'urgence(8) et l'opération.

1999-08-27
- 27 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MD2 During machine transport and installation, the machine may fall down
and you may get caught,resulting in serious injury.
MD2-1 Only qualified persons are allowed to transport and install the machine.
MD2-2 Insert the fork of the forklift at the designated position.

MD3 During machine transport and installation, the water coolong unit may fall
down and you may get caught,resulting in serious injury.
MD3-1 Only qualified persons are allowed to transport and install the machine.

MD2 Beim Transport und bei der Installierung der Maschine besteht die
Gefahr,daß die Maschine umfällt und jemanden schwer verletzt.
MD2-1 Nur qualifizierte Personen für den Transport schwerer Gegenstände
dürfen die Maschine transportieren.
MD2-2 Die Gabel des Gabelstaplers in die festgelegte Position einstecken.

MD3 Beim Transport und bei der Installierung der Wasserkühlanlage besteht die
Gefahr, dass sie umfällt und jemanden schwer verletzt.
MD3-1 Nur qualifizierte Personen dürfen die Wasserkühlanlage transportieren und
installieren.

MD2 En transport et installation de la machine,la machine peut tomber et


vous pouvez être pris dans la machine et avoir des graves blessures.
MD2-1 Le transport de la machine ne doit être effectué que par du personnel
qualifié.
MD2-2 Insérez la fourche de levage à fourche à la position désignée.

MD3 En transport et installation de l’unité de refroidissement à l’eau, l’unité peut


tomber et vous pouvez être pris dans l’unité et avoir des graves blessures.
MD3-1 Le transport de l’unité de refroidissement à l’eau ne doit être effectué que
par du personnel qualifié.

1999-08-27
- 28 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MD4 High voltage parts are present in the control box (2). Touching such
parts by mistake may result in serious injury or death.
MD4-1 Only operators qualified for electrical work and familiar with the
electrical circuits of this machine are allowed to maintain and inspect
electrical components.
MD4-2 Turn off the main power breaker(1) before operation.
Put up a signboard which says 'Under maintenance.
MD4-3 When leaving the machine, close the control box door and lock it.

MD4 Im Steuerschrank (2) gibt es einen Hochspannungsteil. Bei


versehntlicher Berührung besteht die Gefahr, sich schwer oder
lebensgefährlich zu verletzen.
MD4-1 Nur hochqualifizierte Elektriker dürfen die elektrischen Teile dieser
Maschine warten und reparieren.
MD4-2 Vor Wartung den Hauptschalter(1) ausschalten. Für Dritte kenntlich
machen, daß es gearbeitet wird.
MD4-3 Beim Verlassen der Maschine die Tür des Steuerscharanks zumachen
und schließen.

MD4 Les sections de voltage haut sont presents dans l’armoire de


commande(1). Si vous les touchez par erreur, vous pouvez se blesser
sérieusement ou mourrir.
MD4-1 Les réparations et les réglages des circuits électriques ne doivent être
effecutés que par du personnel qualifié
MD4-2 Copez le contacteur de l'alimentation principale (1) avant l'opération.
Apposez une affiche spécifiant 'En train de maintenance'.
MD4-3 Quand vous quittez la machine, fermez la porte de l'armoire de
commande et verrouillez-la.

1999-08-27
- 29 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MD5 When the machining power is on, high voltage is applied to the wire
electrode(12), the upper wire guide section(13), and the lower wire
guide section(14). Touching these parts may result in serious injury or
death.
MD5-1 When the machining power is on, do not place your hands,feet, or
body near the wire electrode, or upper and lower wire guide sections.
MD5-2 When it is necessary to touch the wire electrode, or upper and lower
wire guide sections, check that the machining power LED(9) is off.

MD5 Bei eingeschaltetem Entladeschalter halten die Drahtelektrode(12), die


Oberdrahtzuführung(13) und die Unterdrahtzuführung(14)
Hochspannung. Beim Berühren besteht die Gefahr,sich schwer oder
lebensgefährlich zu verletzen.
MD5-1 Bei eingeschaltetem Entladeschalter Hände,Füße und sonstige
Körperteile von der Drahtelektrode,der Ober-und Unterdrahtzuführung
fernhalten.
MD5-2 Wenn die Drahtelektrode,die Ober-und Unterdrahtzuführung berührt
werden müßten,muß man sich vor dem Berühren vergewissern,daß die
Bearbeitungsstrom LED(9) nicht leuchtet.

MD5 Quand la décharge électrique est mis,haute tension est appliquée à


l'électrode fil(12),la section du guidage supérieur(13),et la section du
guidage inférieur(14).L'action de les toucher par erreur peut causer des
blessures sévères ou des risques de mort.
MD5-1 Quand la décharge électrique est mis,ne vous approchez pas de
l'électrode fil et des section des guidages supérieur et inférieur avec les
mains,les pieds et le corps.
MD5-2 S'il est necessaire de toucher l'électrode fil et les section des guidages
supérieur et inférieur, vérifiez que la alimentation d' usinage DEL (9)
eteint.
1999-08-27
- 30 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MD5-3 When using a separate wire supply unit, install a protective cover to
prevent the operator from touching the wire electrode.

MD6 Grounding the machine incorrectly may result in an electric shock, causing
serious injuries or death.
MD6-1 Ground the machine according to the designated procedure.

MD5-3 Wenn eine separate Drahtversorgung benutzt wird, soll ein


Sicherheitsdeckel angebracht werden, damit man nicht mit der
Drahtelektrode in Berührung kommt.

MD6 Wenn die Maschine nicht richtig geerdet ist, kann ein elektrischer Schlag,
eine schwere Verletzung oder der Tod herbeigeführt werden.
MD6-1 Die Maschine auf die festgelegte Weise erden.

MD5-3 Quand vous utilisez une unite séparée d'alimentation de fil, installez un
revêtement protégé pour que l'opérateur ne touche pas l'électrode de fil.

MD6 Fondement incorrect de la machine peut aboutir à secousse électrique et


vous pouvez se blesser sérieusement ou mourir.
MD6-1 Fondez la machine suivant la procédure désignée.

1999-08-27
- 31 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW2 If you touch the cable crushed by a heavy object, you may get an
electrical shock.The crushed cable may cause a short circuit.
MW2-1 The person qualified for electrical work must lay the cables so that
these are not crushed,and replace the cables if crushed.

MW2 Beim Berühren des zerdrückten Kabels besteht die Gefahr, einen
Stromschlag zu erhalten. Zerdrücktes Kabel kann einen Kurzschluß
haben.
MW2-1 Qualifizierte Elektriker müssen das Kabel fachgerecht verlegen,damit
das Kabel nicht zerdrückt oder beschädigt wird. Wenn das Kabel
beschädigt ist, muß das mit einem neuen ausgetauscht werden.

MW2 Si vous touchez le câble écrasé par un objet lourd,vous pouvez


recevoir une commotion électrique.Le câble écrasé peut causer un
court-circuit.
MW2-1 Une personne qualifiée doit tracer les câbles sans que les câbles soient
écrasés, et rechanger les câbles si les câbles sont écrasés.

1999-08-27
- 33 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW3 You may be caught in the machine during operation.


MW3-1 Keep your hands, feet, and body away from moving parts during
operation.
MW3-2 Do not put your hands,feet,or body inside the machine.

MW3 Es besteht die Gefahr,von laufenden Maschinenteilen geklemmt zu


werden.
MW3-1 Während die Maschine in Betrieb ist,von laufenden Teilen Hände,Füße
und sonstige Körperteile fernhalten.
MW3-2 Mit keinem Körperteil in die Maschine kommen.

MW3 Vous pouvez être pris dans la machine en opération.


MW3-1 Ne vous approchez pas les mains, les pieds,et le corps de sections se
mouvant en opération.
MW3-2 Ne vous mettez pas les mains,les pieds,et le corps dans la machine.

1999-08-27
- 34 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW4 Using oil type coolant may cause fire.


MW4-1 Never use oil type coolant under any circumstances.

MW4 Beim Benutzen des Kühlöls besteht Feuergefahr.


MW4-1 Auf keinem Fall Kühlöl benutzen.

MW4 L'utilisation de l'eau d'arrosage huileux peut causer feu.


MW4-1 Ne utilisez jamais l'eau d'arrosage huileux en aucun cas.

1999-08-27
- 35 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW5 Touching rotating wire cutting device (6) results in injury.


MW5-1 Keep away from rotating wire cutting device.
MW5-2 Turn off the main power breaker (1) before changing the tool attached
to the wire cutting device.

MW5 Es besteht die Gefahr, von umlaufendem Drahtschneidewerkzeug(6)


verletzt zu werden.
MW5-1 Von umlaufendem Drahtschneidewerkzeug sich fernhalten.
MW5-2 Vor dem Austausch des Drahtschneidewerkzeugs den Hauptschalter(1)
der Maschine ausschalten.

MW5 Le dispositif tournant à couper les fils(6) peut vous accrocher et vous
blesser.
MW5-1 Ne vous approchez pas du dispositif tournant à couper les fils.
MW5-2 Coupez le contacteur de l'alimentation principale(1) avant de rechanger
l'outil attaché au dispositif tournant à couper.

1999-08-27
- 36 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW6 You may be caught in the rotating part, resulting in an injury.


MW6-1 Wear snug-fitting clothes. Put long hair up in cap. Do not wear
gloves except for set-up operations carried out with the machine
stopped. Do not wear any accessories. Do not hold the rotating part.

MW6 In umlaufenden Teil können die Finger hineingezogen und verletzt


werden.
MW6-1 Körperanliegende Bekleidung tragen. Lange Haare müssen in einem
Hut aufgesteckt werden. Beim Arbeiten an der laufenden Maschine
keine Handschuhe tragen. Keinen Schmuck tragen. Umlaufende Teile
nicht berühren.

MW6 Vous pouvez être pris dans le section tournant et se blesser.


MW6-1 Portez des vêtements tout justes. Mettez des cheveux longs dans un
bonnet. Ne portez pas de gants sans que vous n'arrêtiez la machine et
ni ne fassiez l'arrangement.Ne portez pas de bijoux.Ne tenez pas le
section tonrnant.

1999-08-27
- 37 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW7 Remodeling the safety device may affect the function of the device,
thus you may get an electrical shock.
MW7-1 Do not modify safety devices. Do not alter the safety device in such a
way that it does not function.

MW7 Wenn die Sicherheitsvorrichtung abgeändert wird, funktioniert sie


nicht mehr richtig. Es besteht die Gefahr, einen Stromschlag zu
erhalten.
MW7-1 Die Sicherheitsvorrichtung nicht abändern. Die
Sicherheitsvorrichtung nicht unbeweglich festmachen.

MW7 La modification du dispositif de sécurité affecte la fonction du


dispositif ,donc vous pouvez recevoir une commotion électrique.
MW7-1 Ne modifiez pas le dispositif de sûreté. Ne fixez pas le dispositif de
sûreté pour que le dispositif de sûreté ne marche pas.

1999-08-27
- 38 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW8 Remodeling the machine may affect the safety device, rendering all
given warnings invalid.
MW8-1 Do not modify the machine. When modification is required, contact
Brother Industries, Ltd. before hand and ask for permission in writing.

MW8 Wenn an der Maschine Modifikationen vorgenommen werden, dann


tritt die Sicherheitsvorrichtung außer Kraft, und alle angegebenen
Warnungen gelten nicht mehr.
MW8-1 Die Maschine nicht modifizieren. Wenn eine Modifikation
notwendig sein sollte, muß man die BROTHER
INDUSTRIES.,LTD. vorher informieren und ihr
schriftliches Einverständnis einholen.

MW8 La modification de la machine peut affecter le dispositif de sécurité et


faire les expressions de tous les avertissements donnés inutiles.
MW8-1 Ne modifiez pas la machine. Si la modification est requise,contactez
Brother Industries,Ltd.d'avance et demandez la permission par écrit.

1999-08-27
- 39 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW9 Dropping a heavy object onto your foot may fracture your foot bones.
MW9-1 When lifting heavy objects, wear safety shoes.

MW10 Lifting heavy objects may cause a hernia of vertebral disk.


MW10-1 When lifting heavy objects, ask for help.
MW10-2 Lift object with the strength of your legs feet instead of your back.

MW9 Wenn schwere Gegenstände auf die Füße fallen, besteht die Gefahr,
sich den Fuß zu brechen.
MW9-1 Beim Heben schwerer Gegenstände Schutzschuhe tragen.

MW10 Beim Heben schwerer Gegenstände besteht die Gefahr, sich einen
Bruch zu heben.
MW10-1 Beim Heben schwerer Gegenstände immer jemanden um Hilfe bitten.
MW10-2 Beim Heben schwerer Gegenstände nicht die Rückenkraft sondern die
Beinkraft benutzen.

MW9 En laissant tomber un objet lourd sur vos pieds, vous pouvez se
fracturer les pieds.
MW9-1 Quand vous levez des objets lourds, portez des chaussures de
protection.

MW10 En levant des objets lourds, vous pouvez souffrir du lumbago.


MW10-1 Quand vous levez des objets lourds, demandez de l'aide.
MW10-2 Levez des objets avec la force de vos jambes au lieu de votre dos.

1999-08-27
- 40 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW11 Hearing ability is reduced when ears are exposed to excessive noise
for a long period of time.
MW11-1 Use protection such as earplugs when working in a noisy environment.

MW11 Lange Zeit dauernder oder großer Lärm ist für die Ohren schädlich.
MW11-1 Bei der Arbeit unter Lärm einen Gehörschutz, z.B. Stöpsel, tragen.

MW11 En travaillant dans un bruit infernal ou pendant de longues heures,


vous pouvez avoir des légers troubles de l’audition.
MW11-1 Quand vous travaillez dans le bruit, portez des protections telles que
les protège-oreilles.

1999-08-27
- 41 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW12 You may hit your head when standing up.


MW12-1 Wear a helmet when working in and around the machine.

MW12 Beim Aufstehen besteht die Gefahr, sich den Kopf anzustoßen und
dabei zu verletzen.
MW12-1 Beim Arbeiten in der Maschine oder in ihrem Bereich einen
Schutzhelm tragen.

MW12 Vous pouvez se frapper la téte en levant.


MW12-1 Portez un casque de protection quand vous travaillez dans et autour de
la machine.

1999-08-27
- 42 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW13 When putting your hand under the leveling bolts (3), you may have
your hand caught, resulting in an injury.
MW13-1 Do not put your hands under the leveling bolt. Use tools to adjust the
level.

MW13 Wenn man unter den Nivellierbolzen (3) greift, besteht die Gefahr,
sich zu klemmen und zu verletzen.
MW13-1 Nicht unter den Nivellierbolzen greifen. Nur mit zweckmäßigem
Werkzeug den Nivellierbolzen einstellen.

MW13 Si vous vous mettez la main sous les boulons â régler le niveau de la
machine (3), vous pouvez avoir la main pris et se blesser.
MW13-1 Ne mettez-vous pas la main sous le boulon à régler le niveau de la
machine. Utilisez des outils pour ajuster le boulon à régler le niveau
de la machine.

1999-08-27
- 43 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW14 When objects are hung on the emergency stop switch (8), the
emergency stop switch may not be pressed,thus you may get an
electric shock or be caught in the machine.
MW14-1 Do not hang any objects on the emergency stop switch.

MW14 Wenn man etwas an den Notfall-stop-Schalter (8) hängt, könnte er bei
Notfall nicht gedrückt werden,und es besteht deshalb die Gefahr,
einen Stromschlag zu erhalten oder von Maschinenteilen eingeklemmt
zu werden.

MW14-1 Nichts an den Notfall-stop-Schalter hängen.

MW14 Si des choses sont accrochées au bouton d'arrêt d'urgence(8),vous ne


pouvez pas appuyer sur le bouton d'arrêt d'urgence,vous ne pouvez pas
appuyer sur le bouton d'arrêt d'urgence,donc vous pouvez recevoir une
commotion électrique et être pris dans la machine.
MW14-1 Ne accrochez pas d'pbjet au bouton d'urgence.

1999-08-27
- 44 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW15 High temperature parts are present in the control box . Therefore, if
papers protrude from the control box document holder (23), these
papers may catch fire.
MW15-1 Do not put in papers larger than A4 or letter size in the control box
document case.

MW15 Im Steuerschrank gibt es einen heißen Teil. Deshalb besteht die


Gefahr, daß sich die im Dokumentenbehälter (23) im Steuerschrank
nicht ordentlich aufbewahrten Papiere entzünden.
MW15-1 Im Dokumentenbehälter im Steuerschrank dürfen keine größere
Papiere als A4 aufbewahrt werden.

MW15 L'armoire de commande a des sections de haute température. Pour


cela, si des papiers dépassez de la boîte à papiers de l'armoire de
commande (23), ils peuvent prendre feu.
MW15-1 Ne mettez pas de papiers excédant la grandeur de papiers de A4 ou de
lettre.

1999-08-27
- 45 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW16 If you climb the machine and water supply unit(18),you may fall
down,resulting in an injury.
MW16-1 Do not climb the machine and water supply unit.

MW16 Wenn man auf die Maschine oder auf den Kühlmittelbehälter(18)
steigh, besteht die Gefahr, zu stürzen und sich zu verletzen.
MW16-1 Nicht auf die Maschine und den Kühlmittelbehälter steigen.

MW16 Si vous montez sur la machine ou le réservoir d'alimentation en eau du


réseau(18),vous pouvez tomber et se blesser.
MW16-1 Ne montez pas sur la machine et le réservoir d'alimentation en eau du
réseau.

1999-08-27
- 46 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW17 When wire tip gets into your eyes, they may be damaged and you could
lose your eyesight.
MW17-1 When mounting the wire electrode and cleaning the used wire (25),be
sure to wear safety goggles.
MW17-2 Do not blow used wires by air.
MW17-3 Use a brush to clean used wires.

MW17 Die Spitze der Drhtelektrode kann die Augen verletzen,und es besteht
die Gefahr,die Sehkraft zu verlieren.
MW17-1 Beim Einsetzen der Drahtelekrode und beim Aufräumen der
Drahtabfälle(25) einen Augenschutz tragen.
MW17-2 Drahtabfälle nicht mit einer Luftdruckpistole wegfegen.
MW17-3 Beim Aufräumen der Drahttabfälle eine Bürste benutzen.

MW17 Si le bord de l'électrode fil est mis dans les yeux, vous pouvez se
blesser les globes oculaires et perdre la vue.
MW17-1 Quand vous montez l'électrode fil sur la machine et enlevez le fil
usé(25),portez des lunettes de protection.
MW17-2 N'enlevez pas le fil usé en air.
MW17-3 Utilisez une brosse pour enlever le fil usé.

1999-08-27
- 47 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW18 If you touch the regenerative resistor, you may be burned because the
regenerative resistor is heated during operation.
MW18-1 Do not remove the regenerative resistor cover (24) for 30 minutes
after operation is finished.

MW19 If you touch the motor,you may be burned because the motor is heated
during operation.
MW19-1 Do not touch the motor for 30 minutes after operation is finished.

MW18 Das Rückkopplungswiderstandsgerät wird während des Betriebs sehr


heiß. Es besteht die Gefahr, daß man sich die Finger bei Berührung
verbrennt.
MW18-1 Innerhalb von 30 Minuten nach dem Ausschalten der Maschine den
Rückkopplungs widerstandsschutz(24) nicht abnehmen.

MW19 Der Motor wird während des Betriebs sehr heiß. Es besteht die
Gefahr,daß man sich die Finger bei Berührung verbrenut.
MW19-1 Innerhalb von 30 Minuten nach dem Ausschalten der Maschine den Motor
nicht berühren.

MW18 Si vous touchez la résistance régénératrice, vous pouvez se brûler


parce que la résistance chauffe en opétarion.
MW18-1 Ne enlevez pas le couvre pour a résistance régénératrice dans 30 minites
après l'arrêt de la machine.

MW19 Si vous touchez le moteur, vous pouvez se brûler parce que le moteur
chauffe en opétarion.
MW19-1 Ne touchez pas le moteur dans 30 minites après l'arrêt de la machine.

1999-08-27
- 48 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW20 If the control box(2) or the operation panel (10) are wet,you may get an
electric shock.
MW20-1 Do not spill coolant over the control box and operation panel.
MW20-2 Do not touch the control box with wet hands.

MW20 Wenn der Steuerschrank(2) oder die Betriebstafel(10) naß ist,besteht


die Gefahr,einen Stromschlag zu erhalten.
MW20-1 Den Steuerschrank und die Betriebstafel vor Flüssigkeit wie
Kühlmittel und Wasser schützen.
MW20-2 Mit naßen Händen den Steuerschrank nicht berühren.

MW20 Si l'armoire de commande (2) ou le panneau d' opération(10)sont


mouillées,vous pouvez recevoir une commotion électrique.
MW20-1 N'arrosez pas l'armoire de commande et le panneau d'opération de l'eau
d'arrosage.
MW20-2 Ne touchez pas l'armoire de commande de la main mouillée.

1999-08-27
- 49 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW21 Used wires(25) may be charged, thus you may get an electrical shock
when disposing of them.
MW21-1 Wear leather gloves.

MW21 Beim Wegwerfen der Drahtabfälle (25) besteht die Gefahr,durch die
elektrisch geladenen Drähte einen Stromschlag zu erhalten.
MW21-1 Lederhandschuhe tragen.

MW21 Le fil usé(25) en charge peut vous donner une commotion électrique,en
le jetant.
MW21-1 Portez des gants en cuir.

1999-08-27
- 50 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW22 When disposing of the used wires(25),these may stick in your hand.
MW22-1 Wear leather gloves.

MW22 Beim Wegwerfen der Drahtabfälle(25)besteht die Gefahr,sich damit in


die Hand zu stechen.
MW22-1 Lederhandschuhe tragen.

MW22 Quand vous jetez les fils usés(25),ils peuvent vous percer la main.
MW22-1 Portez des gants en cuir.

1999-08-27
- 51 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW23 You may have your eyes hurt if coolant splashes into your eyes.
MW23-1 Wear safety goggles when adjusting the coolant flow rate using the
upper and lower nozzle flow rate adjustment valve(15) and threading
jet flow rate adjustment valve(16)
MW23-2 When coolant has splashed into your eyes,wash your eyes with clean
water and see a doctor.

MW23 Kühlmittel ist augenschädlich.


MW23-1 Bei der Einstellung des Fließmengeregulierventils der Ober-und
Unterdüse (15) und des Fließmengeregulierventils des
Drahtführungsstrahls (16) einen Augenschutz tragen.
MW23-2 Wenn die Augen mit dem Kühlmittel in Berührung kommen,dann die
Augen mit sauberem Wasser auswaschen und den Arzt konsultieren.

MW233 Si l'eau d'arrosage vous rejaillit dans les yeux,vous pouvez se blesser
les yeux.
MW23-1 En réglant le débit de l'eau d'arrosage avec la valve de réglage du débit
de l'ajutage supérieur/inférieur (15) et la valve de réglage du débit du
jet à percer (16), portez des lunettes de protection.
MW23-2 Si L'eau d'arrosage vous rejaillit dans les yeux,lavez-vous les yeux à
l'eau claire et consultez un médicin.

1999-08-27
- 52 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW24 If tools are placed on the control box (2) or the machine, these may
fall down when the machine is activated.
MW24-1 Do not place any objects on the control box and the machine.

MW24 Wenn man Werkzeuge auf dem Steuerschrank (2) oder auf der
Maschine liegenläßt, besteht die Gefahr, daß diese wegen der
Bewegung der Maschine herunterfallen.
MW24-1 Auf dem Steuerschrank und auf der Maschine nichts liegenlassen.

MW24 Quand un outillage est mis sur l'armoire de commande (2) et sur la
machine, l'outillage peut tomber en action de la machine.
MW24-1 Ne mettez pas d'objets sur l'armoire de commande ou la machine.

1999-08-27
- 53 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW25 During maintenance and inspection, you may slip,fall down or cause a
collision,resulting in injury.
MW25-1 Before carrying out maintenance and inspection,turn off the main power
breaker (1) and padlock the breaker to prevent it from being turned on.
MW25-2 Wear safety shoes and a helmet.
MW25-3 Put up a signboard which says"Under maintenance"near the machine.

MW25 Beim Warten der Maschine besteht die Gefahr, auszurutschen, sich zu
stoßen und verletzen.
MW25-1 Vor dem Warten der Maschine den Hauptschalter (1) ausschalten und
ihn abschließen, damit niemand mehr einschalten kann.
MW25-2 Sicherheitsschuhe und einen Schutzhelm tragen.
MW25-3 An der Betriebstafel der Maschine anzeigen, daß die Maschine
gewartet wird.

MW25 En maintenance et contrôle de la machine,vous pouvez faire


glisser,tomber, et avoir des blessures.
MW25-1 Avant la maintenance et le contrôle ,coupez le contacteur de
l'alimentation principale(1) et cadenassez le contacteur pour prevenir
la reprise du contacteur.
MW25-2 Portez des chaussures de sécurité et un casque.
MW25-3 Apposez une affiche spécifiant que vous êtes en train de travailler près
du panneau d'opération.

1999-08-27
- 54 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW26 If an incorrect fuse is set, a fire may break out because the protective
device does not function.
MW26-1 Replace with the same rating fuse.

MW27 If the setting of thermal relay is chenged, a fire may break out because
the protective device does not function.
MW27-1 Do not change the setting of the thermal relay.
MW27-2 Set the thermal relay as described by the instructions in
the maintenance manual.

MW26 Bei Verwendung eines falschen Schmelzdrahts funktioniert die


Schutzvorrichtung nicht. Es besteht Feuergefahr.
MW26-1 Einen zerrissenen Schmelzdraht mit einem Draht der selben Norm
austauschen.

MW27 Wenn der Sollwert des Thermorelais geändert wird, funktioniert die
Schutzvorrichtung nicht. Es besteht Feuergefahr.
MW27-1 Das Sollwert des Thermorelais nicht ändem.
MW27-2 Das Thermorelais nach der Wartungsvorshrift richtig einstellen.

MW26 Si un plomb de séreté incorrect est disposé, un feu peut éclater parce
que le dispositif de protection ne marche pas.
MW26-1 Remplacez un plomb épuisé par le même plomb.

MW27 Si la disposition du relais thermique est incorrecte, un feu peut éclater


parce que le dispositif de protection ne marche pas.
MW27-1 Ne changez pas la disposition du relais thermique.
MW27-2 Réglez le relais thermique suivant les instructions dans le manuel de
maintenance.

1999-08-27
- 55 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW28 If coolant or the contents of the ion exchanger (22) is spilt,you may slip,
fall down, or cause a collision,resulting in injury.
MW28-1 Turn off the machine's main power breaker(1).Clean around the
machine and then start operation.
MW28-2 Do not step on the hoses.

MW28 Auf Kühlmittel oder aus dem Ionentauscher (22) übergelaufenem


Kunstharz kann man ausrutschen und sich verletzen.
MW28-1 Vor Inbetriebnahme die Umgebung der Maschine bei ausgeschaltetem
Hauptschalter (1) säubern.
MW28-2 Nicht auf Schläuche treten.

MW28 L'eau ou la résine à l'échange ionique (22) peuvent vous faire glisser et
vous blesser.
MW28-1 Coupez le contacteur de l'alimentation principale (1) de la machine et
nettoyez autour de la machine avant de recommencer l'opération.
MW28-2 Ne marchez pas sur les tuyaux flexibles.

1999-08-27
- 56 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW29 When the power PE line wired from outside is too short,thePE line may
come off when the cable is pulled and you may get an electric shock.
MW29-1 Make the power PE line longer than other lines(L1,L2,L3)allowing some
slack.

MW29 Wenn die von außen verdrahtete Kraft-PE-Line zu kurz ist,kann sie durch
einen Ruck des Kabels abreißen,und es besteht die Gefahr,
einen Stromschlag zu erhalten.
MW29-1 Die Kraft-PE-Linie länger als die anderen Linien (L1,L2,L3) halten und
locker verbinden.

MW29 Si le fil de force motrice, fil de PE, installé à léxterieur est court,en
cause du tirage du câble le fil de PE se décroche et vous pouvez
recevoir une commotion électrique.
MW29-1 Utilisez le fil plus long que autres fils (L1,L2,L3) et connectez le fil en
donnant le fil du jeu.

1999-08-27
- 57 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW30 If you lean on the machine, you may be caught or hit yourself against
the machine when the machine moves, resulting in an injury.
MW30-1 Do not lean on the machine.

MW30 Wenn man sich an die Maschine anlehnt, besteht die Gefahr, daß man
beim Lauf der Maschine gequetscht oder gestoßen und verletzt werden
kann.
MW30-1 Sich nicht an die Maschine anlehnen.

MW30 En s'appuyant à la machine, vous pouvez se prendre dans la machine


ou s'y heurter et se blesser.
MW30-1 Ne vous appuyez pas à la machine.

1999-08-27
- 58 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW31 Touching the machined workpiece with your bare hands may cut your
hand because the edge of the machined workpiece is sharp.
MW31-1 Wear leather gloves.

MW31 Scharfe Ränder der bearbeiteten Werkstücke können die Hände


verletzen.
MW31-1 Lederhandschuhe tragen.

MW31 Les bords coupants des pièces usinées peuvent vous couper les mains.
MW31-1 Portez des gants en cuir.

1999-08-27
- 59 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW32 If the machine is operated without the filter cover(19),coolant may


splash into your eyes when the filter has torn,thus you may have your
eyes damaged.
MW32-1 Check that the filter cover is secured to the water supply unit(18) and
then start machining.
MW32-2 Check that the filter pressure is 0.2 MPa(2kgf/cm2) or less on the
pressure gauge(20).
MW32-3 If the filter pressure has exceeded 0.2 MPa(2kgf/cm2),turn off the main
power breaker(1) and replace with a new filter.

MW32 Beim Betrieb der Maschine ohne den Filterdeckel(19)besteht die


Gefahr, daß bei einer Filterexplosion Kühlimittel ausspritzt und die
Augen verletzt.
MW32-1 Vor Inbetriebnahme sich vergewissern,daß der Filterdeckel am
Kühlmittelbehälter(18)fest angebracht ist.
MW32-2 Sich am Druckmesser(20) vergewissern,daß der Filterdruck unter
0.2MPa(2kgf/cm2)ist.
MW32-3 Wenn der Filterdruck über 0.2MPa(2kgf/cm2)sein sollte,dann den
Hauptschalter(1) ausschalten und den Filter mit einem neuen
austauschen.

MW32 Si la machine fonctionne sans le couvercle filtre(19), en l'éclatement du


filtre l'eau d'arrosage peut rejailler dans les yeux,donc vous risquez
d'avoir des blessures aux yeux.
MW32-1 Vérifiez que le couvercle filtre est fixé au réservoir d'alimentation en
eau du réseau (18) et travaillez.
MW32-2 Vérifiez que la pression filtre est moins que 0.2MPa (2kgf/cm2) avec le
manomètre (20).
MW32-3 Si la pression filtre a excédé 0.2MPa (2kgf/cm2), coupez le contacteur
de l'alimentation principale (1) et rechangez le filtre.

1999-08-27
- 60 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW33 If you touch the parts inside the automatic wire threading device
(17), you may get electric shock.
MW33-1 Before replacing consumable parts of the automatic wire threading
device,turn off the main power breaker (1).
MW33-2 Removing the cover is allowed only when carrying out maintenance
and inspection on the automatic wire threading device.

MW33 Beim Berühren der Teile in der Drahtführungsautomatanlage (17)


besteht die Gefahr, einen Stromschlag zu erhalten.
MW33-1 Vor dem Austausch der verbrauchten Teile in der
Drahtführungsautomatanlage den Hauptschalter (1) der Maschine
ausschalten.
MW33-2 Nur beim Warten der Drahtführungsautomatanlage darf ihr Deckel
abgenommen werden.

MW33 Si vous touchez des parties intérieures du dispositif automatique


d'enfilage fil (17),vous risquez de recevoir une commotion électrique.
MW33-1 Avant de rechanger les parties de consommation du dispositif
automatique d'enfilage fil,coupez le contacteur de l'alimentation
principale (1).
MW33-2 N'enlevez pas le capot que vous ne effectuiez l'inspection et la
maintenance.

1999-08-27
- 61 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW34 If the wire electrode (12) is melted using a lighter and a flammable
substance is nearby, a fire may result.
MW34-1 Check that there are no flammable substances nearby before melting the
wire electrode using a lighter.

MW34 Wenn die Drahtelektrode (12) durch einen Anzünder geschmolzen ist,
können brennbare Stoffe, die in der Nähe sind, brennen.
MW34-1 Beim Schmelzen der Drahtelektrode mit einem Anzünder müssen alle
brennbaren Stoffe entfernt werden.

MW34 Si l’électrode (12) de fil est fondue utilisant un briquet et substance


flammable est tout près, le feu peut prendre.
MW34-1 Contrôlez qu’il n’y a pas de substance flammable tout près avant de
fondre l’électrode de fil utilisant un briquet.

1999-08-27
- 62 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW35 Moving the machine with the cables connected may result in an electric
shock.
MW35-1 Disconnect the cables from the machine main body and the water
supply unit (18) before moving the machine.

MW35 Wenn die Maschine mit angeschlossenen Kabeln bewegt wird, kann ein
elektrischer Schlag verursacht werden.
MW35-1 Bevor die Maschine bewegt wird, Kabel aus dem Hauptteil der
Maschine und der Wasserversorgung herausziehen (18).

MW35 Déplacement de la machine avec les câbles joints peut aboutir à


secousse élecrtique.
MW35-1 Déconnectez les câbles de corps principal de la machine et l’unité
d’alimentation (18) à eau avant de déplacer la machine.

1999-08-27
- 63 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Avertissements et mesures préventives

MW36 Due to machine failure the upper wire guide (13) section may fall on
the operator’s hand.
MW36-1 Perform operation and maintenance with the upper wire guide section
fully raised.

MW36 Durch einen Maschinendefekt kann die obere Drahtführung (13) auf die
Hände des Maschinenführers fallen.
MW36-1 Beim Maschinenbetrieb oder Warten muss die obere Drahtführung an
der höchsten Position sein.

MW36 Par suit de défaillance de machine, la section de guidage de fil


supérieur (13) peut chuter sur la main de l’opérateur.
MW36-1 Effectuez opération et entretien en élevant la section de guidage de fil
supérieur entièrement.

1999-08-27
- 64 - MO 89: HS-50A safe manual maintenance:e1.pm6
Vérification des instructions de sûreté

Safety label check


Safety labels are attached to the machine at the positions shown in the drawing. Check that the safety labels
are firmly attached. If any labels have peeled off, obtain new labels and attach them correctly.

Prüfen der Sicherheitsschilder


Die Sicherheitsschilder sind an der im Bild gezeigten Stelle der Maschine angebracht. Prüfen Sie, ob sie da
fest angeklebt sind. Wenn sie sich von der Maschine lösen sollten, bekommen Sie Ersatzschilder und kleben
Sie sie an die Maschine an.

Vérification des instructions de sûreté


Les instructions de sûreté sont attacheés à la machine. Leurs positions sont indiquées dans le dession ci-
dessous.

1999-9-08 MO:89HS-50A:safe manual.installation 5.pm6


-65 -
HS-50A

CONTENTS
Chapter 1 Possible problems and countermeasures
1.1 Alarm message ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.1-1E

1.2 Measures for errors ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.2-1E

(0001) **WATCH DOG ( ) -------------------------------------------------------------------- (0001)-1E

(0002) **RAM ERROR ( ) --------------------------------------------------------------------- (0002)-1E

(0003) **ROM ERROR ( ) --------------------------------------------------------------------- (0003)-1E

(0004) **TIMER ERROR (SLAVE) ---------------------------------------------------------- (0004)-1E

(0005) **CALC ERROR ( ) ------------------------------------------------------------------- (0005)-1E

(0006) **(MAIN,SLV, WIRE) INTIAL IMPSBLE ------------------------------------------ (0006)-1E

(0007) **POWER TURNED OFF ------------------------------------------------------------ (0007)-1E

(0009) **I/O CRC ERROR ------------------------------------------------------------------- (0009)-1E

(0010) **I/O TIMEOVER --------------------------------------------------------------------- (0010)-1E

(0011) SHORT CIRCUIT 2 --------------------------------------------------------------------- (0011)-1E

(0012) **COMMAND ERROR --------------------------------------------------------------- (0012)-1E

(0013) **(M,L) EXCPT INTRPT () ---------------------------------------------------------- (0013)-1E

(0014) **SYSTEM ERROR () ---------------------------------------------------------------- (0014)-1E

(0015) **INVETOR ERROR (PUMP) -------------------------------------------------------- (0015)-1E

(0016) *COMMAND ERROR (WIRE) ------------------------------------------------------- (0016)-1E

(0017) **POWER MODULE ERR () ---------------------------------------------------------- (0017)-1E

(0018) **POWER FAIL () ---------------------------------------------------------------------- (0018)-1E

(0019) *THERMAL ERROR(I/O) -------------------------------------------------------------- (0019)-1E

(0020) *POWER FAIL 5 ------------------------------------------------------------------------ (0020)-1E

(0021) COMMUNICATION I/F ER ------------------------------------------------------------ (0021)-1E

(0022) **KERNEL ERROR() ------------------------------------------------------------------- (0022)-1E

(0023) *NO ERROR NO. ------------------------------------------------------------------------ (0023)-1E

(0024) **PULSE ERROR (?? AXIS) ----------------------------------------------------------- (0024)-1E

(0025) *? IN-POS CHCK TMOUT ------------------------------------------------------------- (0025)-1E

(0026) *ORG POS ERROR ---------------------------------------------------------------------- (0026)-1E

(0027) **DATA ERR () ------------------------------------------------------------------------- (0027)-1E


1999-12-29 Chapter 1 - 1E MO89:HS-50A. Maintenance manual contents:pm6
HS-50A

(0028) DATA ERR (DATA BANK) ------------------------------------------------------------ (0028)-1E

(0029) **DC POWER ERROR (±15V ) -------------------------------------------------------- (0029)-1E

(0030) **OVER HEAT -------------------------------------------------------------------------- (0030)-1E

(0031) *EDIT ERROR --------------------------------------------------------------------------- (0031)-1E

(0032) *PARITY ER () -------------------------------------------------------------------------- (0032)-1E

(0033) **SERVO DRIVER ERROR ----------------------------------------------------------- (0033)-1E

(0034) **PMU NOT OPERABLE -------------------------------------------------------------- (0034)-1E

(0035) **? SERVO ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ (0035)-1E

(0036) **WIRE GUIDE SET ERROR --------------------------------------------------------- (0036)-1E

(0037) **THERMAL ERROR(TANK) -------------------------------------------------------- (0037)-1E

(0038) ** WIRE TANK POWER ERROR (TANK) ------------------------------------------ (0038)-1E

(0039) DIREC.CHANGE ERROR ------------------------------------------------------------- (0039)-1E

(0040) *DEVIATION ERROR ----------------------------------------------------------------- (0040)-1E

1.3 Trouble shooting -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.3-1E

1.3.1 Machine accuracy and machining --------------------------------------------------------- 1.3.1-1E

1.3.2 Wire feed system --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.3.2-1E

1.3.3 Water circulation --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.3.3-1E

1.3.4 Water supply unit -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.3.4-1E

1.3.5 Automatic wire threading device ---------------------------------------------------------- 1.3.5-1E

1.3.6 B axis index table --------------------------------------------------------------------------- 1.3.6-1E

1.3.7 Control system ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 1.3.7-1E

1999-12-29 Chapter 1 - 2E MO89:HS-50A. Maintenance manual contents:pm6


Chapter 2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

CONTENTS
Chapter 2 Maintenance Operation Procedures
2.1 Replacement Procedures (Machine)

2.1.1 Cover
2.1.1.1 XY axes cover removal ------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.1.1-1E
2.1.1.2 ZUV axes cover removal ----------------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.1.2-1E
2.1.1.3 XY axes bellows replacement ------------------------------------------------------------ 2.1.1.3-1E
2.1.1.4 Z axis bellows replacement -------------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.1.4-1E
2.1.1.5 UV axes telescopic cover replacement -------------------------------------------------- 2.1.1.5-1E
2.1.1.6 Side cover removal (EU) ----------------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.1.6-1E
2.1.1.7 Top cover removal (EU) ------------------------------------------------------------------ 2.1.1.7-1E
2.1.1.8 Front cover removal (EU) ---------------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.1.8-1E

2.1.2 Limit Switch


2.1.2.1 XY axes overrun LS replacement -------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.2.1-1E
2.1.2.2 Z axis over run LS replacement ---------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.2.2-1E
2.1.2.3 UV axes overrun LS replacement -------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.2.3-1E

2.1.3 Feed Axis


2.1.3.1 XY axes motor replacement -------------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.3.1-1E
2.1.3.2 XY axes ball screw replacement --------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.3.2-1E
2.1.3.3 XY axes linear scale replacement -------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.3.3-1E
2.1.3.4 Z axis motor replacement (including Coupling, Encoder) ------------------------------- 2.1.3.4-1E
2.1.3.5 Z axis ball screw replacement ( including Coupling, Encoder, Break) ------------------ 2.1.3.5-1E
2.1.3.6 UV axes motor replacement (including Coupling, Encoder) ---------------------------- 2.1.3.6-1E
2.1.3.7 UV axes ball screw replacement --------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.3.7-1E
2.1.3.8 CABLE GUIDE KOL03 replacement --------------------------------------------------- 2.1.3.8-1E

2.1.4 Z axis
2.1.4.1 Z axis sleeve replacement --------------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.4.1-1E

1999-11-5 Chapter 2 - 1E MO89:HS-50A. Maintenance manual contents:pm6


Chapter 2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.5 Machining tank


2.1.5.1 SLIDE SEAL GUIDE L,S replacement ------------------------------------------------ 2.1.5.1-1E
2.1.5.2 SLIDE SEAL BASE L,S replacement --------------------------------------------------- 2.1.5.2-1E
2.1.5.3 SLIDE SEAL replacement --------------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.5.3-1E
2.1.5.4 ROD SEAL PACKING replacement ---------------------------------------------------- 2.1.5.4-1E
2.1.5.5 Bulk head packing replacement --------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.5.5-1E
2.1.5.6 Drain valve packing replacement -------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.5.6-1E
2.1.5.7 SOLENOID, 6ED 67.5 replacement ---------------------------------------------------- 2.1.5.7-1E
2.1.5.8 Machining tank removal ----------------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.5.8-1E
2.1.5.9 Machining tank installation -------------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.5.9-1E

2.1.6 Wire drive


2.1.6.1 Back tension motor replacement -------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.6.1-1E
2.1.6.2 Wire reel magnetic brake replacement ------------------------------------------------- 2.1.6.2-1E
2.1.6.3 Wire breakage detector replacement --------------------------------------------------- 2.1.6.3-1E
2.1.6.4 Powder brake replacement -------------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.6.4-1E
2.1.6.5 Wire drive motor replacement ---------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.6.5-1E
2.1.6.6 Wire cutting motor replacement -------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.6.6-1E
2.1.6.7 Wire collection box overflow sensor replacement ------------------------------------ 2.1.6.7-1E

2.1.7 Upper and Lower wire guide


2.1.7.1 Upper wire guide unit disassembly and assembly -------------------------------------- 2.1.7.1-1E
2.1.7.2 Lower wire guide unit disassembly and assembly ------------------------------------- 2.1.7.2-1E
2.1.7.3 Joint plug removal ------------------------------------------------------------------------ 2.1.7.3-1E

2.1.8 Water Supply and Water Supply Unit


2.1.8.1 Water solenoid valve disassembly ------------------------------------------------------ 2.1.8.1-1E
2.1.8.2 Water solenoid valve replacement ------------------------------------------------------ 2.1.8.2-1E
2.1.8.3 Ejector solenoid valve dissembly ------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.8.3-1E
2.1.8.4 Ion exchange valve replacement --------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.8.4-1E
2.1.8.5 Relief valve replacement ---------------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.8.5-1E
2.1.8.6 Water level sensor replacement --------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.8.6-1E
2.1.8.7 Pump mechanical seal replacement ----------------------------------------------------- 2.1.8.7-1E
2.1.8.8 Pump replacement ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.8.8-1E
2.1.8.9 Flexible tube replacement -------------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.8.9-1E

1999-11-5 Chapter 2 - 2E MO89:HS-50A. Maintenance manual contents:pm6


Chapter 2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.9 Automatic Wire Threading Device


2.1.9.1 Automatic wire threading device removal and installation --------------------------- 2.1.9.1-1E
2.1.9.2 Pinch roller solenoid replacement ----------------------------------------------------- 2.1.9.2-1E
2.1.9.3 Guide movement motor replacement -------------------------------------------------- 2.1.9.3-1E
2.1.9.4 Wire feed motor replacement ---------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.9.4-1E
2.1.9.5 Wire electrode movement solenid valve replacement --------------------------------- 2.1.9.5-1E
2.1.9.6 Threading limit switch replacemen ----------------------------------------------------- 2.1.9.6-1E
2.1.9.7 Threading wire detector adjustment ---------------------------------------------------- 2.1.9.7-1E

2.1.10 B axis unit


2.1.10.1 B axis brush block replacement ------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.10.1-1E
2.1.10.2 B axis oil seal replacement ------------------------------------------------------------ 2.1.10.2-1E
2.1.10.3 B axis motor replacement ------------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.10.3-1E
2.1.10.4 B axis encoder replacement ----------------------------------------------------------- 2.1.10.4-1E

2.1.11 Inter lock


2.1.11.1 Inter lock switch replacement (standard) --------------------------------------------- 2.1.11.1-1E
2.1.11.2 Interlock switch replacement (EU) --------------------------------------------------- 2.1.11.2-1E

1999-11-5 Chapter 2 - 3E MO89:HS-50A. Maintenance manual contents:pm6


CONTENTS
2.2 Replacement Procedures (Electrical)

2.2.1 Format the floppy disk by the FACIT ---------------------------------------------------- 2.2.1-1E

2.2.2 Communication maintenance when replacing PCB -------------------------------------- 2.2.2-1E

2.2.3 NCPCBreplacement ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.2.3-1E

2.2.4 MEM PCB replacement ------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.2.4-1E

2.2.5 WSLV PCB replacement ------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.2.5-1E

2.2.6 Wire ROM replacement ------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.2.6-1E

2.2.7 GRAM module replacement --------------------------------------------------------------- 2.2.7-1E

2.2.8 IO PCB replacement ----------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.2.8-1E

2.2.9 WD PCB replacement --------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.2.9-1E

2.2.10 Servo driver replacement ------------------------------------------------------------------ 2.2.10-1E

2.2.11 DCPCBreplacement ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.2.11-1E

2.2.12 PMUreplacement ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.2.12-1E

2.2.13 Unit of discharge replacement ------------------------------------------------------------ 2.2.13-1E

2.2.14 AVRreplacement -------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.2.14-1E

2.2.15 Battery replacement ---------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.2.15-1E

2.2.16 Keyboard replacement ------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.2.16-1E

2.2.17 LCD replacement ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.2.17-1E

2.2.18 LCD inverter replacement ---------------------------------------------------------------- 2.2.18-1E

2.2.19 Pump inverter replacement --------------------------------------------------------------- 2.2.19-1E

1999-12-29 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual contents:pm.6


Chapter 2 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3 Adjustment Procedures (Machine)


2.3.1 Feed axis
2.3.1.1 XY axes over run LS adjustment -------------------------------------------------------- 2.3.1.1-1E
2.3.1.2 Z axis over run LS adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------- 2.3.1.2-1E
2.3.1.3 UV axes over run LS adjustment -------------------------------------------------------- 2.3.1.3-1E
2.3.1.4 Z axis origin offset valve setting -------------------------------------------------------- 2.3.1.4-1E
2.3.1.5 UV axes origin offset, grid shift valve setting ------------------------------------------ 2.3.1.5-1E
2.3.1.6 XY axes grid shift valve setting --------------------------------------------------------- 2.3.1.6-1E
2.3.1.7 Z axis grid shift value inputting --------------------------------------------------------- 2.3.1.7-1E
2.3.1.8 Origin offset value inputting ------------------------------------------------------------ 2.3.1.8-1E
2.3.1.9 Grid shift value inputting ---------------------------------------------------------------- 2.3.1.9-1E

2.3.2 Wire feed system


2.3.2.1Wire tension adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------- 2.3.2.1-1E

2.3.3 Automatic Wire Threading Device


2.3.3.1Threading LS adjustment ----------------------------------------------------------------- 2.3.3.1-1E
2.3.3.2 Threading wire detector replacement --------------------------------------------------- 2.3.3.2-1E

2.3.4 B axis unit


2.3.4.1B axis home position detection dog adjustment ---------------------------------------- 2.3.4.1-1E

1999-11-5 Chapter 2 - 1E MO89:HS-50A.Maintenance manual contents:pm6


CONTENTS
2.4 Adjustment Procedures (Electrical)

2.4.1 Deviation adjustment --------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.4.1-1E

2.4.2 AVR1 voltage adjustment ---------------------------------------------------------------- 2.4.2-1E

2.4.3 Discharge power voltage check ---------------------------------------------------------- 2.4.3-1E

2.4.4 Discharge clamp power voltage check -------------------------------------------------- 2.4.4-1E

2.4.5 PMU unit output check ------------------------------------------------------------------- 2.4.5-1E

2.4.6 Inverter error content check ------------------------------------------------------------- 2.4.6-1E

1999-12-29 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual contents:pm.6


Chapter 2 - 2E
CONTENTS
Chapter 3 Electrical system

3.1 Block Diagram--------------------------------------------------------------- 3.1-1E


3.2 Composition and Names ---------------------------------------------------- 3.2-1E
3.3 Capacity and Location of Breaker and Fuse -------------------------------- 3.3-1E
3.4 Externalcables --------------------------------------------------------------- 3.4-1E
3.5 Control device function ------------------------------------------------------ 3.5-1E
3.5.1 NCPCB ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3.5.1-1E

3.5.2 MEM PCB --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3.5.2-1E

3.5.3 WSLVPCB --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3.5.3-1E

3.5.4 GRAMmodule ----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3.5.4-1E

3.5.5 IOPCB ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3.5.5-1E

3.5.6 WDPCB ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3.5.6-1E

3.5.7 Servo driver -------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3.5.7-1E

3.5.8 DCPCB ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3.5.8-1E

3.5.9 PMD PCB ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3.5.9-1E

3.5.10 SUDPCB ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3.5.10-1E

3.5.11 CLP/RPCB --------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3.5.11-1E

3.5.12 KEYPCB ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3.5.12-1E

3.5.13 Tank PCB ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3.5.13-1E

3.5.14 Wire OP PCB ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 3.5.14-1E

3.5.15 EXIOPCB ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 3.5.15-1E

1999-9-16
Chapter 3 - 1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual contents:pm.6
CONTENTS
Chapter 4 Wiring Diagrams

4.1 Power Input (Japan) --------------------------------------------------------- 1/16


4.2 Power Input (200V Except Japan) ------------------------------------------ 1/16
4.3 Power Input (400V Except EU) -------------------------------------------- 1/16
4.4 Power Input (EU) ------------------------------------------------------------ 1/16
4.5 AVR,FAN ------------------------------------------------------------------- 2/16
4.6 IO PCB 1 -------------------------------------------------------------------- 3/16
4.7 IO PCB 2 -------------------------------------------------------------------- 4/16
4.8 Servo Driver 1 --------------------------------------------------------------- 5/16
4.9 Servo Driver 2 --------------------------------------------------------------- 6/16
4.10 WD PCB -------------------------------------------------------------------- 7/16
4.11 W.OP PCB ------------------------------------------------------------------ 8/16
4.12 Discharge 1 ------------------------------------------------------------------ 9/16
4.13 Discharge 2 ------------------------------------------------------------------ 10/16
4.14 KEY PCB ------------------------------------------------------------------- 11/16
4.15 Manual Pulse Generator ----------------------------------------------------- 12/16
4.16 Tank Control ----------------------------------------------------------------- 13/16
4.17 DPU ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 14/16
4.18 PMU ------------------------------------------------------------------------- 15/16
4.19 Connection Between PCB -------------------------------------------------- 16/16

1999-9-16
Chapter 4 - 1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual contents:pm.6
CONTENTS
Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc.

5.1 Counter display ------------------------------------------------------------- 5.1-1E


5.1.1 Open voltage period display -------------------------------------------------------------- 5.1.-1E

5.1.2 Discharge frequency display ------------------------------------------------------------- 5.1.-1E

5.1.3 Water conductivity display --------------------------------------------------------------- 5.1.-1E

5.2 Data display on taper cutting ----------------------------------------------- 5.2-1E


5.3 Pitch error compensation display ------------------------------------------ 5.3-1E
5.4 Servo diviation amount display -------------------------------------------- 5.4-1E
5.5 Description of <IO> screen ------------------------------------------------ 5.5-1E
5.6 I/O(Main) ------------------------------------------------------------------- 5.6-1E
5.7 I/O(Slave) ------------------------------------------------------------------- 5.7-1E
5.8 I/O(Local) ------------------------------------------------------------------- 5.8-1E
5.9 I/O(Wire) -------------------------------------------------------------------- 5.9-1E
5.10 Display Inspection ---------------------------------------------------------- 5.10-1E
5.11 Special power-ON --------------------------------------------------------- 5.11-1E
5.12 Hidden Operation ----------------------------------------------------------- 5.12-1E
5.13 Power break warm up operation------------------------------------------- 5.13-1E
5.14 Energy compensation ------------------------------------------------------- 5.14-1E
5.15 Motion Check --------------------------------------------------------------- 5.15-1E
5.16 PCB Sticker ----------------------------------------------------------------- 5.16-1E
5.17 Dip Switch ------------------------------------------------------------------ 5.17-1E
5.18 Soft Switch ------------------------------------------------------------------ 5.18-1E

1999-12-27 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual contents:pm.6


Chapter 5 - 1E
CONTENTS
Chapter 6 Water Flow System

6.1 Water Flow system --------------------------------------------------------------- 6-1E

1999-11-07 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual contents:pm.6


Chapter6- 1E
CONTENTS
Chapter 7 Parts List

Parts List ------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 7-1E

1999-11-07 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual contents:pm.6


Chapter7- 1E
CONTENTS
Chapter 8 Appendix

Appnedix 1 Tool and measuring equipment list ------------------------------------ 8.2-1E


Appnedix 2 Expendables and quasi-expendables list ------------------------------ 8.4-1E

1999-11-07 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual contents:pm.6


Chapter8 - 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

1.2 Measures for errors

<Ref. No.0001>

No.5000 **WATCH DOG (MAIN)


No.5001 **WATCH DOG (SLAVE)
No.5002 **WATCH DOG (LOCAL)
No.8004 **WATCH DOG (WIRE)

<Meaning>

1. The CPU indicated in brackets has a trouble. The watch dog timer has not
been renewed for more than the specified time.

*Watch dog supervisory time


Main .............. 20msec
Local .............. 20msec
Slave .............. 73msec
Wire .............. 73msec

<Cause>

1. The NC PCB is broken. (MAIN,LOCAL)


2. The WSLV PCB is broken. (SLAVE,WIRE)
3. The MEM PCB is broken. (MAIN,LOCAL,SLAVE)

<Measures>

1. Replace the NC PCB.


Refer to 2.2.3 NC PCB replacement.

2. Replace the WSLV PCB.


Refer to 2.2.4 MEM PCB replacement.

3. Replace the MEM PCB.


Refer to 2.2.5 WSLV PCB replacement.

1999-12-29 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0001):pm.6


(0001)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No 0002>

No.5003 **RAM ERROR (MAIN)


No.5005 **RAM ERROR (SLAVE)
No.5007 **RAM ERROR (LOCAL)
No.5009 **RAM ERROR (MAIN-LOC1)
No.5010 **RAM ERROR (MAIN-LOC2)
No.5011 **RAM ERROR (MAIN-SLV)
No.5055 **RAM ERROR (MAIN-LOC3)
No.8002 **RAM ERROR (WIRE)
No.8003 **RAM ERROR (MAIN-WIRE)
No.8099 **RAM ERROR (LOCAL2)
No.8104 RAM ERROR (LOCAL2)

<Meaning>

1. When the power was turned on, the contents of the RAM indicated in brackets
could not be read and written correctly.

*Main-Local RAM
MAIN-LOC1 : Common RAM other than Nos. 2 and 3
MAIN-LOC2 : Dual port RAM
MAIN-LOC3 : Software protect RAM
LOCAL2 : Graphic Video RAM

<Cause>

1. The NC PCB is broken. (MAIN,LOCAL,MAIN-LOC*)


2. The WSLV PCB is broken. (SLAVE,WIRE,MAIN-SLV,MAIN-WIRE)
2. The GRAM module is broken. (LOCAL2)

<Measures>

1. Replace the NC PCB.


Refer to 2.2.3 NC PCB replacement.

2. Replace the WSLV PCB.


Refer to 2.2.5 WSLV PCB replacement.

3. Replace the GRAM module.


Refer to 2.2.7 GRAM module replacement.

1999-12-29 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0002):pm.6


(0002)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref. No. 0003>

No.5004 **ROM ERROR (MAIN)


No.5006 **ROM ERROR (SLAVE)
No.5008 **ROM ERROR (LOCAL)
No.8001 **ROM ERROR (WIRE)

<Meaning>

1. When the power was turned on, a problem was detected in the contents of the
ROM indicated in brackets.

<Cause>

1. The MEM PCB is mounted incorrectly. (MAIN,SLAVE,LOCAL)

2. The NC PCB is broken. (MAIN,LOCAL)

3. The MEM PCB is broken. (MAIN,LOCAL,SLAVE)

4. The WSLV PCB is broken. (SLAVE,WIRE)

<Measures>

1. For cause 1, check that the MEM PCB is mounted correctly.


2. If the same error is still generated even in measure 1, cause 2,3 or 4 may be
responsible. Replace the NC PCB, MEM PCB, orWSLV PCB.
Refer to 2.2.3 NC PCB replacement.
2.2.4 MEM PCB replacement.
2.2.5 WSLV PCB replacement.

1999-12-29 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0003):pm.6


(0003)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref. No.0004>

No.5012 **TIMER ERROR (SLAVE)


No.8071 **TIMER ERROR (WIRE)

<Meaning>

1. Interruption of the slave CPU, wire CPU free running timer does not occur even
after the specified time has elapsed, and timer overrun occurs.

<Cause>

1. FaultyWSLV PCB

<Measures>

1. Replace the WSLV PCB.


Refer to 2.2.5 WSLV PCB replacement.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0004):pm.6


(0004)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No.0005>

No.5014 **CALC ERROR (MAIN)


No.5015 **CALC ERROR (SLAVE)
No.5016 **CALC ERROR (LOCAL)
No.8005 **CALC ERROR (WIRE)

<Meaning>

1. The CPU indicated in brackets has had an abnormal operation.

*Examples
Division by 0
Overflow by multiplication
The result of division has exceeded the range that can be expressed within
32 bits of code.

<Cause>

1. The NC PCB is broken. (MAIN,LOCAL)

2. The WSLV PCB is broken. (SLAVE,WIRE)

<Measures>

1. Replace the NC PCB.


Refer to 2.2.3 NC PCB replacement.

2. Replace the WSLV PCB.


Refer to 2.2.5 WSLV PCB replacement.

1999-12-29 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0005):pm.6


(0005)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No0006>

No.5017 **MAIN INTIAL IMPSBLE


No.5018 **SLV INTIAL IMPSBLE
No.8000 **WIRE INTIAL IMPSBLE

<Meaning>

1. When the power was turned on, the CPU could not start properly.

<Cause>

1. The MEM PCB or WSLV PCB is mounted incorrectly.

2. The NC PCB is broken. (MAIN)

3. The WSLV PCB is broken. (SLAVE,WIRE)

4. The MEM PCB is broken. (MAIN,SLAVE)

<Measures>

1. For cause 1, check that the MEM PCB or WSLV PCB is mounted correctly.

2. If the same error is no longer generated in measure 1, cause 2,3 or 4 may be


responsible. Replace the PCB.
Refer to 2.2.3 NC PCB replacement.
2.2.4 MEM PCB replacement.
2.2.5 WSLV PCB replacement.

1999-12-29 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0006):pm.6


(0006)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No.0007>

No.5028 **POWER TURNED OFF

<Meaning>

1. 3 seconds have passed since the PWOFF signal was turned on.

*This error is not generated by a normal power-off.

<Cause>

1. Defect of power circuit in the IO PCB

2. Defect of IO PCB or alarm processing circuit

<Measures>

1. In either case, replace the IO PCB with new one.


Refer to 2.2.8 IO PCB replacement.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0007):pm.6


(0007)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No.0009>

No.5030 **I/O CRC ERROR 1


No.5032 **I/O CRC ERROR 2
No.5034 **I/O CRC ERROR 3
No.5036 **I/O CRC ERROR 4
No.5038 **I/O CRC ERROR 5
No.8095 **I/O CRC ERROR 9
No.8097 **I/O CRC ERROR 10

<Meaning>
1. CRC error has occurred because the machine received incorrect data during
communication between each PCB and the NC unit.

<Cause>
1. External noise
2. Faulty PCB or cable connection

<Measures>
1. CRC error 1 or 2 - check the keyboard and key cable connection. Replace the
PCB or cable if necessary.
Refer to 2.2.16 Keyboard replacement.

2. CRC error 3 - check the IO PCB and IO cable connection. Replace the PCB or cable
if necessary.
Refer to 2.2.8 IO PCB replacement.

3. CRC error 4 - check the DC PCB, IO PCB and optical fiber cable (1A,1B,1C)
connection. Replace the PCB or cable if necessary.
Refer to 2.2.11 DC PCB replacement.
2.2.8 IO PCB replacement.

4. CRC error 5 - check the EXIO PCB, IO PCB and EXIO cable connection.
Replace the PCB or cable if necessary.
Refer to 2.2.8 IO PCB replacement.

5. CRC error 9 or 10 -check the WD PCB , WSLV PCB and WD cable connection.
Replace the PCB or cable if necessary.
Refer to 2.2.9 WD PCB replacement.
2.2.5 WSLV PCB replacement.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0009):pm.6


(0009)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref. No. 0010>

No.5031 **I/O TIMEOVER 1


No.5033 **I/O TIMEOVER 2
No.5035 **I/O TIMEOVER 3
No.5037 **I/O TIMEOVER 4
No.5039 **I/O TIMEOVER 5
No.8096 **I/O TIMEOVER 9
No.8098 **I/O TIMEOVER 10

<Meaning>
1. Framing error occurred during communication between the each PCB and the NC
unit, causing an unrecoverable.

<Cause>
1. External noise
2. Faulty PCB or cable connection

<Measures>
1. I/O timeover error 1 or 2 - check the keyboard and key cable connection. Replace
the PCB or cable if necessary.
Refer to 2.2.16 Keyboard replacement.

2. I/O timeover error 3 - check the IO PCB and IO cable connection. Replace the PCB
or cable if necessary.
Refer to 2.2.8 IO PCB replacement.

3. I/O timeover error 4 - check the DC PCB, IO PCB and optical fiber cable (1A,1B,1C)
connection. Replace the PCB or cable if necessary.
Refer to 2.2.11 DC PCB replacement, 2.2.8 IO PCB replacement.

4. I/O timeover error 5 - check the EXIO PCB, DC PCB and EXIO cable connection.
Replace the PCB or cable if necessary.
Refer to 2.2.8 IO PCB replacement.

5. I/O timeover error 9 or 10 -check the WD PCB , WSLV PCB and WD cable
connection. Replace the PCB or cable if necessary.
Refer to 2.2.9 WD PCB replacement, 2.2.5 WSLV PCB replacement.

Note : CRC error 1 may occur with an I/O timeover error. This occurs
because the first station's data packet. At this time, reset the
I/O timeover error and check whether the same error occurs again.
If it does, the keyboard of the first or second station, or its cable, is faulty.
1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0010):pm.6
(0010)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No.0011>

No.8033 SHORT CIRCUIT 2

<Meaning>

1. The circuit that supplies the power to the wire is cut.

<Cause>

1. The brush is worn out.

2. The groove for the guide roller D30 is worn out.

3. The power supply cable breaks.

4. The SUD unit is broken.

5. The DC PCB is broken.

<Measures>

1. Replace the brush.

2. Replace the guide roller D30 on the lower part of the wire guide with a new one.

3.Check the power supply cable connection. Replace the cable if necessary.

4. Replace the SUD unit.


Refer to 2.2.13 Unit of discharge replacement.

5. Replace the DC PCB.


Refer to 2.2.11 DC PCB replacement.

1999-12-29 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0011):pm.6


(0011)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No.0012>

No.5052 **COMMAND ERROR

<Meaning>

1. Main CPU is not synchronized with WSLV CPU.

<Cause>

1. Faulty NC PCB or WSLV PCB

<Measures>

1. Replace NC PCB or WSLV PCB.


Refer to 2.2.3 NC PCB replacement.
2.2.5 WSLV PCB replacement.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0012):pm.6


(0012)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No.0013>

No.5091 **M EXCPT INTRPT (*)


No.5093 **L EXCPT INTRPT (*)

<Meaning>

1. Main CPU or local CPU has detected incorrect interruption.

*The figure in brackets ( ) indicates interruption no.

<Cause>

1. Faulty NC PCB or MEM PCB

<Measures>

1. Replace MEM PCB or NC PCB.


Refer to 2.2.3 NC PCB replacement.
2.2.4 MEM PCB replacement.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0013):pm.6


(0013)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref. No. 0014>

No.5501 *SYSTEM ERROR (MAIN)


No.6150 *SYSTEM ERROR (SLV)
No.6280 *SYSTEM ERROR (MC)

<Meaning>

1. SYSTEM ERROR (MAIN) - NMI was detected, but there was no corresponding
error.

2. Other SYSTEM ERRORS - an error was detected, but there was no corresponding
error.

<Cause>

1.Faulty NC PCB or WSLV PCB

<Measures>

1. Replace NC PCB or WSLV PCB.


Refer to 2.2.3 NC PCB replacement.
2.2.5 WSLV PCB replacement.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0014):pm.6


(0014)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No.0015>

No.8034 *INVERTER ERROR (PUMP)

<Meaning>

1. A pump inverter alarm has occurred.

<Cause>

1. The cable of tank control has come off.

2. The main pump is overload.

3. The main pump is broken.

4. The pump inverter is broken.

5. The WD PCB is broken.

<Measures>

1. Connect the cable of tank control.

2. Make sure that the main pump doesn't lock.

3. Replace the main pump.

4. Replace the pump inverter.


Refer to 2.2.19 Pump inverter replacement.

5. Replace the WD PCB.


Refer to 2.2.9 WD PCB replacement.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0015):pm.6


(0015)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No.0016>

No.8042 **COMMANDERROR(WIRE)

<Meaning>

1. Wire CPU can not read and write RAM between main CPU and wire CPUcorrectly.

<Cause>

1.Faulty NC PCB or WSLV PCB

<Measures>

1. Replace NC PCB or WSLV PCB.


Refer to 2.2.3 NC PCB replacement.
2.2.5 WSLV PCB replacement.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0016):pm.6


(0016)-1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No.0017>

No.8053 **POWER MODULE ERR1


No.8054 **POWER MODULE ERR2
No.8055 **POWER MODULE ERR3

<Meaning>

1. FET in the PMU is broken.

<Cause>

1. The PMU is broken.

2. The PMD unit is broken.

3. The DC PCB is broken.

<Measures>

1. Replace the PMU.


Refer to 2.2.12 PMU replacement.

2. Replace the PMD unit.


Refer to 2.2.13 Unit of discharge replacement.

3. Replace the DC PCB.


Refer to 2.2.11 DC PCB replacement.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0017):pm.6


(0017)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No.0018>

No.8056 **POWER FAIL 1


No.8057 **POWER FAIL 2
No.8058 **POWER FAIL 3
No.8059 **POWER FAIL 4

<Meaning>

1. Discharge power supply fault.

<Cause>

1. Wiring connection is difective.

2. Fuse on the discharge units blew or circuit protector is tripped.

3. Each unit of discharge is broken.

<Measures>

1. In case of POWER FAIL 1 (discharge PCB power supply fault).


(1) Check the power connector of the SUD,PMD and CLP/R PCB (CN-
D11,D21,D41).
(2) Check that harnesses between the DC PCB and SUD, PMD, CLP/R PCB are
connected incorrectly.
(3) Replace fuse of the SUD, PMD and CLP/R PCB.
Refer to 3.3 Capacity and Location of Breaker and Fuse.

2. In case of POWER FAIL 2 (clamp power supply fault).


(1) Replace fuse Q3 on the transformer T1 or turn on the circuit protector CPF2T.
Refer to 3.3 Capacity and Location of Breaker and Fuse.
(2) Check that harnesses between the DC PCB and CLP/R PCB are connected
incorrectly.
(3) Replace the CLP/R PCB.
Refer to 2.2.13 Unit of discharge replacement.
(4) Replace the DC PCB.
Refer to 2.2.11 DC PCB replacement.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0018):pm.6


(0018)-1E
Chapter 1 Measures for errors HS-50A

3. In case of POWER FAIL 3 (main discharge power supply fault).


(1) Replace fuse Q1 on the transformer T1 or turn on the circuit protector CP1T.
Refer to 3.3 Capacity and Location of Breaker and Fuse.
(2) Check wiring of TB1 and TB4 on the DPU and that harnesses between the DC
PCB and CLP/R PCB are connected incorrectly.
(3) Replace the CLP/R PCB.
Refer to 2.2.13 Unit of discharge replacement.
(4) Replace the DC PCB.
Refer to 2.2.11 DC PCB replacement.

4. In case of POWER FAIL 4 (sub discharge power supply fault).


(1) Replace fuse Q2 on the transformer T1 or turn on the circuit protector CPF1T.
Refer to 3.3 Capacity and Location of Breaker and Fuse.
(2) Check wiring of TB1 and TB4 on the DPU and that harnesses between the DC
PCB and CLP/R PCB are connected incorrectly.
(3) Replace the CLP/R PCB.
Refer to 2.2.13 Unit of discharge replacement.
(4) Replace the DC PCB.
Refer to 2.2.11 DC PCB replacement.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0018):pm.6


(0018)-2E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No.0019>

No.5023 *THERMAL ERROR(CNTLBX)


No.8060 *THERMAL ERROR(I/O)

<Meaning>

1. Thermal relay in the control box has tripped. (CNTLBX)

2. Thermal relay for rush prevention circuit on the IO PCB is tripped. (I/O)

<Cause>

1.The cooling fan insdie and outside the control box is stopped. (CNTLBX)

2. This generates by turning on and off the machining repeatedly. (I/O)

3. The IO PCB is broken. (I/O)

<Measures>

1. Clean the cooling fan or replace it. (CNTLBX)

2. Turn on the machining after waiting for a while to restart the machine. (I/O)

3. Replace the IO PCB. (I/O)


Refer to 2.2.8 IO PCB replacement.

1999-12-29
(0019)- 1E MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0019):pm.6
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No.0020>

No.8061 **POWER FAIL 5

<Meaning>

1. Connection of harnesses between the DC PCB and SUD, PMD PCB are defective.

<Cause>

1. Connection of harnesses between the DC PCB and SUD, PMD PCB are defective.

2. The DC PCB is broken.

3. The SUD PCB is broken.

4. The PMD PCB is broken.

<Measures>

1. Check connection of harnesses between the DC PCB and SUD, PMD PCB.

2. Replace the DC PCB.


Refer to 2.2.11 DC PCB replacement.

3. Replace the SUD PCB.


Refer to 2.2.13 Unit of discharge replacement.

4. Replace the PMD PCB.


Refer to 2.2.13 Unit of discharge replacement.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0020):pm.6


(0020)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No.0021>

No.7626 COMMUNICATION I/F ER

<Meaning>

1. Incorrect command was given from the edit processing area to the
communication processing area in the local CPU.

<Cause>

1. The data were damaged by an external factor, such as depletion of


back-up batteries, replacement of PCB, etc.

2.Faulty NC PCB or MEM PCB.

<Measures>

1. For cause 1, check the battery alarm at the bottom right of the screen.
If the alarm is displayed, the batteries have run out. Replace the
batteries with new ones, and take procedure 2 as mentioned below. If not
displayed, data are damaged by an external factor. Take procedure 2.
Refer to 2.2.15 Battery replacement.

2. Select [MAINTENANCE MENU] from [EXTERNAL PROGRAM I/O], output all


data, format the memory, and re-enter all data. However, when faulty data or
programs cannot be output, delete them.

3. If the same error is no longergenerated in measure 2, cause 2 may be responsible.


Replace MEM PCB or NC PCB.
Refer to 2.2.3 NC PCB replacement.
2.2.4 MEM PCB replacement.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0021):pm.6


(0021)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No. 0022>

No.7996 **KERNEL ERROR (MAIN)


No.7997 **KERNEL ERROR (SLAVE)
No.7998 **KERNEL ERROR (LOCAL)
No.8010 **KERNEL ERROR (WIRE)

<Meaning>

1. An error has occurred in the main CPU or local CPU operation system.

<Cause>

1. The NC PCB is broken. (MAIN,LOCAL)

2. The WSLV PCB is broken. (SLAVE, WIRE)

3. The MEM PCB is broken. (MAIN, LOCAL, SLAVE)

<Measures>

1. Replace NC PCB.
Refer to 2.2.3 NC PCB replacement.

2. Replace WSLV PCB.


Refer to 2.2.5 WSLV PCB. replacement.

3. Replace MEM PCB.


Refer to 2.2.4 MEM PCB. replacement.

1999-12-29 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0022):pm.6


(0022)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref. No.0023>

No.7999 *NO ERROR NO.

<Meaning>

1. Machining data are converted to interpretive code during operation. Some


interpretive code are invalid.

<Cause>

1. The data were damaged by an external factor, such as depletion of


back-up batteries, replacement of PCB, etc.

<Measures>

1. For cause 1, check the battery alarm at the bottom right of the screen.
If the alarm is displayed, the batteries have run out. Replace the
batteries with new ones, and take procedure 2 as mentioned below.
If not displayed, data are damaged by an external factor. Take procedure 2.

2. Delete the data which generated the error. After data deletion, re-enter the
data by programming or by inputting them from an external unit.

1999-10-23 (0023)- 1E MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0023):pm.6


Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No.0024>

No.5097 **PULSE ERROR (Z AXIS)


No.5098 **PULSE ERROR (U AXIS)
No.5099 **PULSE ERROR (V AXIS)
No.5100 **PULSE ERROR (B AXIS)

<Meaning>

1. Pulse signal sent from the axis indicated in brackets could not be read
correctly.
Note: The detected amount of shift can be checked by [DISPLACEMENT PULSE]
on the <Input/output> screen.

<Cause>

1. Faulty setting for [Machine Parameter] to [System 1, 2, 3] to


[?MTR PULSE CHCK ALLOWANCE]

2. Faulty motor or servo driver.

3. Faulty motor cord.

4. Faulty WSLV PCB.

<Measures>

1. For cause 1, check the setting for [Machine Parameter] to [System 1, 2, 3] to


[?MTR PULSE CHCK ALLOWANCE].

2. Replace the motor or servo driver.


Refer to 2.2.10 servo driver replacement.

3. Replace the motor cord.

4. Replace the WSLV PCB.


Refer to 2.2.5 WSLV PCB replacement.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0024):pm.6


(0024)-1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No. 0025>

No.5535 *X IN-POS CHCK TMOUT


No.5536 *Y IN-POS CHCK TMOUT
No.5537 *Z IN-POS CHCK TMOUT
No.5538 *U IN-POS CHCK TMOUT
No.5539 *V IN-POS CHCK TMOUT
No.5540 *B IN-POS CHCK TMOUT

<Meaning>

1. The amount of deviation of the axis in error did not become smaller than the
value set for [Machine Parameter] to [System 1, 2] to [IN-POSITION WIDTH?]
even after the time set to [Machine Parameter] to [System 1, 2] to
[? IN-POSI CHECK TIMEOUT] has elapsed after completion of operation.

<Cause>

1. Faulty setting for [Machine Parameter] to[System 1, 2] to


[? IN-POSI CHECK TIMEOUT] or [IN-POSITION WIDTH?]

<Measures>

1. Check the time set to [Machine Parameter] to [System 1, 2] to


[? IN-POSI CHECK TIMEOUT] and [IN-POSITION WIDTH?] of the axis in error.

2. Check that there is no mechanical failure.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0025):pm.6


(0025)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No.0026>

No.6163 *ORG POS ERROR X


No.6164 *ORG POS ERROR Y
No.6165 *ORG POS ERROR Z
No.6167 *ORG POS ERROR U
No.6168 *ORG POS ERROR V
No.6169 *ORG POS ERROR B

<Meaning>

1. When the zero position limit switch is turned on at the time of zero posion
return (dog type), the rapid traverse is normally changed to a low speed
feed. However, in this case, though the speed was decelerated at the specified time
constant, the zero position limit switch was turned off by passing over the zero
position dog after it was once turned on.

2. When the zero position limit switch is changed from ON to OFF, zero position
signal of the motor is generally confirmed at the time of zero position return
(dog type), but this was not confirmed.

<Cause>

1. Defect of the zero position limit switch

2. Zero dog length does not match the machine parameter.

3. Faulty motor or servo driver.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0026):pm.6


(0026)- 1E
Chapter 1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Measures>

1. Check if the zero position limit switch is working properly, referring to


Input on the input/output screen.
In proper working condition of the zero position limit switch, the corresponding
bits show "1" when the zero position limit switch is turned on, or "0" when turned
off. If not, replace the zero position limit switch.

2. If the same error is no longer generated in measure 1, cause 2 may be responsible.


Measure the length of the zero position limit switch through the input on
the <Input/output> screen to determine whether the value matches the machine
parameter using the formula below. If it does not match, set the correct value to
[Machine Parameter] to [X DOG RETURN HIGH SPD TRAVEL] so that the
formula below is satisfied.

L: Length of the measured zero dog (mm)


V: [Machine Parameter] to [X DOG RETURN HIGH SPD TRAVEL] (mm/min)
T: [Machine Parameter] to [X RAPID FEED TIME CONSTANT 1] (msec)
K: [Machine Parameter] to [X-AXIS POSITION LOOP GAIN] (sec-1)
F: [Machine Parameter] to [X-AXIS RAPID FEED FORWARD RATIO] (%)

V 1 T 1 100-F
L< • (0.02 + • + • )
60 2 1000 K 100

3. If the same error is no longer generated after measure 2 is taken, cause 3


may be responsible. Replace the motor or servo driver.
Refer to 2.2.10 Servo driver replacement.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0026):pm.6


(0026)- 2E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No.0027>

No.5025 **DATA ERR (M/C PARAM)


No.6057 **DATA ERR (USER PARAM)
No.8206 *DATA ERR (WORK ZERO)
No.8207 *DATA ERR (CUT TECH)
No.8208 *DATA ERR (MACRO VAR. )

<Meaning>

1. Structure of the data in brackets ( ) currently selected is damaged.

<Cause>

1. The data were damaged by an external factor, such as depletion of


back-up batteries, replacement of PCB, etc.

<Measures>

1. For cause 1, check the battery alarm at the bottom right of the screen.
If the alarm is displayed, the batteries have run out. Replace the
batteries with new ones, and take procedure 2 as mentioned below. If not
displayed, data are damaged by an external factor. Take procedure 2.
Refer to 2.2.15 Battery replacement.

2. Delete the data which generated the error. After data deletion, re-enter the
data by programming or by inputting them from an external unit.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0027):pm.6


(0027)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No.0028>

No.7623 DATA ERR (DATA BANK)

<Meaning>

1. Structure of the data bank not currently selected is damaged.

<Cause>

1. The data were damaged by an external factor, such as depletion of back-up


batteries, replacement of PCB, etc.

<Measures>

1. For cause 1, check the battery alarm at the bottom right of the screen.
If the alarm is displayed, the batteries have run out. Replace the batteries with new
ones, and take procedure 2 as mentioned below.
If not displayed, data are damaged by an external factor. Take procedure 2.
Refer to 2.2.15 Battery replacement.

2. Follow the steps below to recover the damaged data:


1) Switch to program editing mode and select [DIRECTORY OF MEMORY].
2) Select [DATA BANK].
3) The <DIRECTORY OF MEMORY> screen for the data bank appears.
Take measure 3 if no circle ( ) is displayed, regardless of METRIC or INCH.
4) Delete the data indicated with a circle ( ).
5) After deleting the data, re-enter the data by programming or by inputting it from
an external unit.
6) Repeat steps 4) to 5) for all data indicated with a circle ( ).
7) If the above error still occurs even when no circle ( ) is indicated, proceed to
measure 3.

3. Format the memory.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0028):pm.6


(0028)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No.0029>

No.8081 **DC POWER ERROR (±15V)

<Meaning>

1. Servo control power (±15VDC) is faulty.

<Cause>

1. Wiring between the WSLV PCB, TB1, AVR1 is defective.

2. The AVR1 is broken.

3. The WSLV PCB is broken.

<Measures>

1. Check wiring between the WSLV PCB, TB1 and AVR1.

2. Replace the AVR1.


Refer to 2.2.14 AVR replacement.

3. Replace the WSLV PCB.


Refer to 2.2.5 WSLV PCB replacement.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0029):pm.6


(0029)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No.0030>

No.8065 **OVER HEAT 1


No.8066 **OVER HEAT 2
No.8067 **OVER HEAT 3
No.8068 **OVER HEAT 4
No.8069 **OVER HEAT 5

<Meaning>

1. The temperature in the PMU is faulty (OVER HEAT 1-3).

2. The temperature in the control box is faulty (OVER HEAT 4).


Note : OVER HEAT 5 isn't used.

<Cause>

1. The temperature around the machine is too high.

2. The cooling fan is not functioning correctly.

3. The PMU is broken.

<Measures>

1. Lower the temperature around the machine.

2. In case of OVER HEAT 1-3.


(1) Check the cooling fan for PMU1-3 heat sink.
(2) Replace the PMU.
Refer to 2.2.12 PMU replacement.

3. In case of OVER HEAT 4.


Check the cooling fan in the control box and the cooling fan for resister.

1999-10-23
(0030)- 1E MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0030):pm.6
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No.0031>

No.6153 *EDIT ERROR 1


No.6154 *EDIT ERROR 2
No.6155 *EDIT ERROR 3

<Meaning>

1. During editing, data is damaged.

2. Data cannot be edited.

<Cause>

1. Content of data area is damaged.

<Measures>

1. If the error still occurs,


- Delete the file that may be the problem source.
- Format the memory.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0031):pm.6


(0031)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref.No.0032>

No.6158 *PARITY ER (USER PARA)


No.6159 *PARITY ER (M/C PARAM)
No.6160 *PARITY ERR (PRGRM)
No.6299 *PARITY (SOFT SWITCH)

No.8203 *PARITY (WORK ZERO)


No.8204 *PARITY (CUT TECH)
No.8205 *PARITY (MACRO VARIA.)

<Meaning>
1. When the power was turned on or when the NC was reset, data in brackets ( )
was found damaged.

2. Data in brackets ( ) was found damaged when editing, referencing, or


operating.

3. For parity error (soft switch), soft switch data was found damaged when the
power was turned on.

<Cause>
1. The data were damaged by an external factor, such as depletion of
back-up batteries, replacement of PCB, etc.

<Measures>
1. For cause 1, check the battery alarm at the bottom right of the screen.
If the alarm is displayed, the batteries have run out. Replace the batteries with
new ones, and take procedure 2 as mentioned below.
If not displayed, data are damaged by an external factor. Take procedure 2.
Refer to 2.2.15 Battery replacement.

2. Delete the data which generated the error. After data deletion, re-enter the data by
programming or by inputting them from an external unit.

*Tentative measure
Display the file which generated the error. Check the data, and correct
them each time when an abnormal character is found.
(This measure does not always work to repair the data.)

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0032):pm.6


(0032)-1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref. No.0033>

No.8082 **SERVO DRIVER ERROR

<Meaning>

1. The power supply (5V,±15V,24V) for XY,UV,Z (,B) servo driver is faulty.

<Cause>

1. Wiring between each servo driver, TB1, AVR1, AVR2, AVR5 and the WSLV PCB is
defective.

2. Each servo driver is broken.

3. AVR1, AVR2, or AVR5 is broken.

4. The WSLV PCB is broken.

<Measures>

1. Check wiring between each servo driver, TB1, AVR1, AVR2, AVR5 and the WSLV
PCB.

2. Replace each servo driver.


Refer to 2.2.10 Servo driver replacement.

3. Replace AVR1, AVR2, or AVR5.


Refer to 2.2.14 AVR replacement.

4. Replace the WSLV PCB.


Refer to 2.2.5 WSLV PCB replacement.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0033):pm.6


(0033)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref. No.0034>

No.8085 **PMU NOT OPERABLE

<Meaning>

1. The PMU1, 2, and 3 is not operable.

<Cause>

1. JP1, 2, and 3 on the DC PCB is short.

2. The DC PCB is broken.

<Measures>

1. Set up JP1, 2, and 3 on the DC PCB in open.


Refer to 3.5.8 DC PCB.

2. Replace the DC PCB.


Refer to 2.2.11 DC PCB replacement.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0034):pm.6


(0034)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref. No.0035>

No.8105 **X SERVO


No.8106 **Y SERVO
No.8107 **Z SERVO
No.8108 **U SERVO
No.8109 **V SERVO
No.8110 **B SERVO

<Meaning>

1. Each servo driver alarm has occurred.

<Cause>

1. Each axis motor is overload.

2. Wiring between each servo driver, motor, encorder, and the WSLV PCB is
defective.

3. Each servo driver is broken.

4. Each axis motor or encorder is broken.

5. The WSLV PCB is broken.

<Measures>

1. Eliminate the cause of overload.

2. Check wiring between each servo driver, motor, encorder, and the WSLV PCB.

3. Check contents of each servo driver and replace it.


Refer to 3.5.7 Servo driver.
2.2.10 Servo driver replacement.

4. Replace each axis motor or encorder.

5. Replace the WSLV PCB.


Refer to 2.2.5 WSLV PCB replacement.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0035):pm.6


(0035)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref. No.0036>

No.8114 **WIRE GUIDE SET ERROR

<Meaning>

1. The value set for [Lower wire guide] is larger than that set for [Combine wire
guide spans] when power was turned on.

<Cause>

1. Incorrect values were entered through the keyboard.

2. The NC PCB is broken.

<Measures>

1. Enter correct values or perform vertical alignment.

2. Replace the NC PCB.


Refer to 2.2.3 NC PCB replacement.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0036):pm.6


(0036)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref. No.0037>

No.8045 **THERMAL ERROR (TANK)

<Meaning>

1. The filter pump is overload.

<Cause>

1. The filter pump is overload.

2. Thermal set value is wrong.

3. The TANK PCB is broken.

4. The WD PCB is broken.

<Measures>

1. Check that the filter pump is not lock.


Push reset button of thermal TR1 in the terminal box.

2. Set up thermal TR1 in the terminal box in nomal value.


Push reset button of thermal TR1.
Refer to 3.3 Capacity and Location of Breaker and Fuse.

3. Replace the TANK PCB.

4. Replace the WD PCB.


Refer to 2.2.9 WD PCB replacement.

1999-10-23 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0037):pm.6


(0037)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref. No.0038>

No.8046 **WIRE TANK POWER ERROR (TANK)

<Meaning>

1. Tank control power is faulty.

<Cause>

1. The connector (TANK P, TANK S) of tank control has come off.

2. Breaker Q8 or Q9 is tripped.

3. The TANK PCB is broken.

4. The WD PCB is broken.

<Measures>

1. Connect the connector.


(Make sure to lock it firmly)

2. Turn on breaker Q8 or Q9.

3. Replace the TANK PCB.

4. Replace the WD PCB.


Refer to 2.2.9 WD PCB replacement.

1999-12-29 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0038):pm.6


(0038)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref. No.0039>

No.8048 DIREC.CHANGE ERROR

<Meaning>
1. The origin side limit switch of the guide motor did not turn on within 10
seconds after the guide motor was turned on.

<Cause>
1. The guide motor is faulty.

2. The guide motor limit switch (motor side and/or origin side) is faulty.

<Measures>

1. Replace the guide motor.

2. Replace the limit switch of the guide motor.

1999-12-29 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0039):pm.6


(0039)- 1E
Chapter1 Measures for errors HS-50A

<Ref. No.0040>

No.5512 *DEVIATIONERROR1X
No.5513 *DEVIATIONERROR1Y
No.5514 *DEVIATION ERROR1 Z
No.5515 *DEVIATIONERROR1U
No.5516 *DEVIATIONERROR1V
No.5517 *DEVIATIONERROR1B
No.5522 *DEVIATIONERROR2X
No.5523 *DEVIATIONERROR2Y
No.5524 *DEVIATION ERROR2 Z
No.5525 *DEVIATIONERROR2U
No.5526 *DEVIATIONERROR2V
No.5527 *DEVIATIONERROR2B

<Meaning>
1. The amount of the deviation has exceeded.

<Cause>
1. The motor is overloaded.

2. The motor (encoder) is faulty.

3. The servo driver is faulty.

4. The WSLV PCB is faulty.

<Measures>

1. Check the parameter.

2. Replace the motor (encoder).


Refer to 2.1.3.1 XY axes motor replacement
2.1.3.4 Z axis motor replacement
2.1.3.6 UV axes motor replacement
2.1.10.3 B axis motor replacement
2.1.10.4 B axis encoder replacement

3. Replace the servo driver.


Refer to 2.2.10 Servo driver replacement

4. Replace the WSLV PCB.


Refer to 2.2.5 WSLV PCB replacement
1999-12-29 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e1.2(0040):pm.6
(0040)- 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.1.2 Z,U,V axes Cover removal(1/3)

1. Stop the machining tank after bringing the machining tank next to the column by a jog
operation.

2. Bring the V axis to the - stroke edge and the U axis to the center of the stroke by a jog
operation. Stop the Z axis at the position indicated below by a jog operation.
(The position where the lower face of the wire case and the lower face of Z under
cover.)

3. Turn off the power and the breaker.

4. Remove the EMC SIDE COVER 3 for EU use.


Refer to 2.1.1.6 Side cover removal (EU)

5. Remove the thumb screw M4×8 (2pcs), and remove the WIRE COLLECTION BOX.
(Only for the machine provided with automatic wire threading device)

WIRECOLLECTIONBOX

thumb screw M4×8

lower face of the


wire case

lower face of Z
under cover
02C03.doc

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.1.1.2:pm6
2.1.1.2-1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.1.2 Z,U,V axes Cover removal (2/3)

6. Remove the screw, pan M5×8 (2pcs.). Then, remove the Z UNDER COVER and
theTELESCOPICCOVER,2.

7. Remove the screw, bind M5×8 and the V COVER.

8. After detaching the machining tank from the column, turn off the power and
the breaker.

9. Remove the screw, panM5×8(6pcs.), and BELLOWS, 290×190.


Remove the Z GUIDE COVER.

screw, panM5×8
TELESCOPIC COVER,2
screw, panM5×8 COVER
Z UNDER COVER Z UNDER COVER
screw, panM5×8

02C86.doc

bind M5×8
02C04.doc
V COVER
screw, panM5×8
Z GUIDE COVER

BELLOWS,290×190
screw, panM5×8

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.1.1.2:pm6
2.1.1.2-2E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.1.2 Z,U,V axes Cover removal (3/3)

10. Lower the Z axis to - Z axis stroke by a jog operation.


Remove the screw, pan M5×8 (2pcs.) and the COVER.

11. Remove the screw, panM5×8(2pcs.) and the TELESCOPIC COVER, 1.

12. Reverse steps from 4. to 11 to secure it.


*Make sure the V COVER is placed correctly to mount it.

screw,panM5×8 TELESCOPICCOVER,1

02C09.doc

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.1.1.2:pm6
2.1.1.2-3E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.1.3 X,Y axes bellows replacement (1/2)

[X axis]

1. Remove the screw, pan (s/p washer) 5×8 DB (2pcs).


Then, remove the SADDLE COVER FR.

2. Remove the screw, pan (s/p washer) 5×12 DB (4pcs.) .


Then, remove the bellows 576 ×502.

3. Reverse steps from 1 to 2 to mount it.

BELLOWS, 576 ×502

SADDLE COVER,FR

SCREW, PAN (S/P WASHER) 5 × 8DB

02C05.doc

SCREW, PAN (S/P WASHER) 5 ×12DB

BELLOWS,576 ×502
02C87.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code

BELLOWS,576×502 659234001
BELLOWS,638×325 659111001
1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.1.1.3:pm6
2.1.1.3- 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.1.3 X,Y axes bellows replacement (2/2)

[Y axis]
1. Remove the EMC side cover for EU use.
Refer to 2.1.1.6 Side cover removal (EU)

2. Detach the machining tank from the column by jog operation.

3. Remove the screw, pan (s/p washer) 5×12 DB (4pcs.) which fixes the
bellows 638 × 325.

4. Fold the bellows 638 × 325 and then tilt it to pull up.

5. Reverse steps from 1.to 3.

BELLOWS, 638 ×325

02C05.doc

SCREW, PAN (S/P WASHER) 5 × 12 DB

02C87.doc

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.1.1.3:pm6
2.1.1.3- 2E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.1.4 Z axis Bellows replacement

1. Detach the machining tank from the column by the jog operation. Then, stop it.

2. Stop Z axis after brining the Z axis to the highest point of Z axis stroke.

3. Turn off the power and the breaker.

4. Remove the EMC SIDE COVER 3 for the EU use machine.


Refer to 2.1.1.6 Side cover removal (EU)

5. Remove the screw, panM5×8(4pcs.) and replace the BELLOWS, 290×190.

BELLOWS,290×190

02C06.doc
screw,panM5×8

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code

BELLOWS,290×190 659378001

1999-9-15 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual:2.1.1.4:pm6
2.1.1.4- 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.1.5 U,V axes telescopic cover replacement

1. Detach the machining tank from the column a jog operation. And stop it.

2. Bring the V axis to the stroke edge and the U axis to the center of the stroke by a jog
operation. Stop the Z axis at the position indicated below by a jog operation.
(The position where the lower face of the wire case, 50A and the lower face of Z under
cover.)

3. Turn off the power and the breaker.

4. Remove the EMC SIDE COVER 3 for the EU use machine.


Refer to 2.1.1.6 Side cover removal (EU)

5. Remove the thumb screw M4×8 (2pcs), and remove the WIRE COLLECTION BOX.
(Only for the machine provided with automatic wire threading device)

6. Remove the screw, panM5×8 (4pcs.). Then, remove the Z UNDER COVER and the
TELESCOPIC COVER,2.

7. Replace the TELESCOPIC COVER, 2.

8. Reverse steps from 4. to 7 to secure it.

screw,panM5×8
WIRECOLLECTIONBOX
TELESCOPIC COVER,2
Z UNDER COVER

thumb screw M4×8

02C03.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code

TELESCOPIC COVER,2 659057001

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual:2.1.1.5:pm6
2.1.1.5-1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.1.6 Side cover removal (EU)

1. Loosen cover securing screws (2 pcs.) at the edge of the upper side, remove
cover securing screws(screw pan (s/p washer)5×12) besides them.

2. Remove the cover while pulling up.


*Pay attention not to tear the aluminum tape when detaching or attaching the
cover.

EMC SIDE COVER 3


EMC SIDE COVER 2
EMC SIDE COVER 1

02C24.doc

screw pan (s/p washer)5×12

02C25.doc

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual:2.1.1.6:pm6
2.1.1.6-1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.1.7 Top cover removal (EU)

1. Remove the Screw Pan (s/p washer) 5×8 (12pcs.).

2. Remove the EMC TOP COVER.


*Pay attention not to tear the aluminum tape.

Screw Pan (s/p washer) 5×8

EMC TOP COVER

02C26.doc

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual:2.1.1.7:pm6
2.1.1.7- 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.1.8 Front cover removal (EU)

1. Remove the bolt, socket (S/P washer) M5×12. (9pcs.).

2. Remove the EMC FRONT COVER 1.


*Pay attention not to tear the aluminum tape.

02C27.doc

bolt, socket (S/P washer) M5×12

EMC FRONT COVER 1

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual:2.1.1.8:pm6
2.1.1.8- 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.2.2 Z axis Over run LS replacement(1/2)

1. Turn off the power and the breaker.

2. Loosen the screw, pan (s/p washer) M5×8 (4pcs) and remove the COVER, SU50A.
Remove the EMC SIDE COVER 1 for EU use machine.
Refer to 2.1.1.6 Side cover removal

3. Cut the cable tie securing the cable of the LIMIT SWITCH, 2DMV to be replaced,
and remove the connector.

4. Loosen the screw, pan M3×12 (2pcs), and then remove the LIMIT SWITCH, 2DMV.

5. Make sure the new LIMIT SWITCH 2DH is correctly placed and secure it.
*the securing torque is 0.23 N m (2.3kg f/cm)

COVER, SU50A

02C08.doc

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.1.2.2:pm6
2.1.2.2 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.2.2 Z axis Over run LS replacement(2/2)

6. Secure the cable with the cable tie as it was and reattach the connector.

7. Adjust the Over run LS


Refer to 2.3.1.2 Z axis over run LS

8. Set the origin offset value .


Refer to 2.3.1.4 Z axis origin offset value.

9. Set the gird shift value.


Refer to 2.3.1.7 Z axis grid shift value setting

LIMIT SWITCH, 2DMV

02C95.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code

LIMIT SWITCH, D2MV 6323115000

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.1.2.2:pm6
2.1.2.2 - 2E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.3 Feed axis

2.1.3.1 X,Y axes motor replacement (1/2)

1. Remove the EMC SIDE COVER 3 for the EU use machine.


Refer to 2.1.1.6 Side cover removal

2. X axis: Remove the BELLOWS, 576 ×502.


Y axis: Remove the BELLOWS, 638 ×325.
Refer to the replacement 2.1.1.3 XY axes bellows replacement

3. Remove the connector for the MOTOR, 49.3W ASSY

4. Loosen the securing bolt (1 pcs) on the COUPLING, D10×D10 ball screw side.

5. Remove bolt, socket M4×12(4 pcs) while holding the MOTOR, 49.3W ASSY in
one hand.

COUPLING, D10×D10 MOTOR FLANGE

bolt, socket M4×12

securing bolt MOTOR, 49.3W ASSY

bolt, socket M4×8

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code

MOTOR, 49.3W ASSY 659234001

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.1.3.1:pm6
2.1.3.1 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.3.1 X,Y axes motor replacement (2/2)

6. Pull the MOTOR, 49.3W ASSY horizontally and remove it.

7. Remove bolt, socket M4×8 (4 pcs) and remove the MOTOR FLANGE from the
MOTOR, 49.3W ASSY

8. Remove the COUPLING, D10×D10 from the MOTOR, 49.3W ASSY.

9. Remove the MOTOR, 49.3W ASSY to the new one, and reverse steps from 1. to 6.
* The tightening torque for the COUPLING, D10×D10 securing bolt is 1.4Nm.
(14.3kg f/cm)

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.1.3.1:pm6
2.1.3.1 - 2E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.3.2 X,Y axes ball screw replacement (1/2)

1. Remove the TABLE COVER FR, TABLE COVER RE, BELLOWS 576×502,
SADDLE COVER FR, BELLOWS, 638×325.
Refer to 2.1.1.1. XY axes removal

2. Turn off the power switch and the breaker.

Remove the motor.


Refer to 2.1.3.1 X,Y axes motor replacement

3. Remove the straight pin 8×26×M5 (2pcs.) bolt, socket 6×20 (2pcs. )
and Remove the BEARING HOLDER.

4. Remove the U NUT FU01SS and remove the COLLAR.


*The specified tool is needed for U NUT FU01SS.

U NUT FU01SS

COLLAR

Xaxis: BALL SCREW L558 ASSY


Yaxis: BALL SCREW L408 ASSY

bolt, socket 5×12


tube, lylon
02C15.doc
straight pin 8×26×M5
BEARING HOLDER
bolt, socket 6×20

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code Fine U nut exclusive tie tool
nominal size 01
Xaxis:
BALL SCREW L558 ASSY 634730001
Yaxis:
BALL SCREW L408 ASSY 632953001
RETAINING, RING, C10 048100142
1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.1.3.2:pm6
2.1.3.2 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.3.2 X,Y axes ball screw replacement (2/2)

6. Remove the tube, lylon and the bolt, socket 5×12 (4pcs.) and remove ball screws.

7. Remove the RETAINING, RING, C10 from the ball screw and remove the BALL
BEARING,6000ZZ.

8. Replace the ball screw to the new one. Reverse steps from 1.to 7. To secure it.
*The tightening torque for U nut UF01S 7.35±0.1Nm.(72±10 kgf)

BALL BEARING, 60000ZZ.


02C83.doc

RETAINING, RING, C10

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.1.3.2:pm6
2.1.3.2 - 2E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.3.3 X,Y axes linear scale replacement (1/2)

1. Remove the cover and bellows.


Refer to 2.1.1.1 XY axes cover removal

2. Remove the screw, pan 5×8 (4pcs.) and remove the COVER RB50A.
Remove the EMC SIDE COVER 2 for EU use machine.
Refer to 2.1.1.6 Side cover replacement (EU)

3. Open the control box and remove the metal connector for the linear scale on the
upper side of the breaker handle.

4. Remove the bolt, socket 6×25 (2pcs.) , washer, plain s6(2pcs.), washer, spring 2-
6(2pcs.), bolt, socket 4×20(2pcs.) and remove the linear scale

5. Remove the cable guide KOL 03. (This step is only for Y axis.)
Refer to Cable guide KOL03 replacement.

screw, pan 5×8

COVER RB50A

02C81.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code

X axis:
LINEAR SCALE, L400 659013001
Y axis:
LINEAR SCALE, L400 659017001

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.1.3.3:pm6
2.1.3.3 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.3.4 Z axis motor replacement (1/2)

1. Mount the Z BRACKET, 50A and TABLE FIXTURE, 50A.

2. Turn off the power and the breaker.

3. Remove the screw, pan (s/p washer) M4×8 (4pcs.) and remove the Z UPPER COVER, 1.
Remove the EMC TOP COVER for the EU use machine, and then remove Z UPPER
COVER,1
Refer to 2.1.1.7 top cover replacement (EU)

4. Remove the connector for the MOTOR, 57.0W ASSY

Z UPPER COVER, 1

screw,pan (s/p washer)M4×8

bolt,socket M6×12
(018081231)
washer, spring 2-6
(028060242)
02C13.doc washer, plain m6
(025060232)

TABLE FIXTURE, 50A


Z BRACKET, 50A
(659361001)
(659362001)

02C12.doc

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.1.3.4:pm6
2.1.3.4 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.3.4 Z axis motor replacement (2/2)

5. Loosen the securing bolt on the motor side of the COUPLING, D10×D10.

6. Remove the bolt, socket 4 ×12 (4 pcs.) while holding the MOTOR, 57.0W ASSY with
one hand.

7. Remove the MOTOR, 57.0W ASSY.

8. Remove the bolt, socket 4×8 (4pcs.) and remove the MOTOR FLANGE from
MOTOR, 57.0W ASSY.

9. Replace the MOTOR, 57.0W ASSY with a new one, Reverse steps from 3.to 8.
*The tightening torque for the COUPLING, D10×D10 securing screw is 1.4 Nm
(14.3 kg f cm)

10. Set the origin offset value and the grid shift value.
Refer to the 2.3.1.4 Z axis origin offset value setting.
2.3.1.7 Z axis girds shift value setting.

MOTOR, 57.0W ASSY

bolt, socket 4 ×12 bolt, socket 4×8

MOTORFLANGE

COUPLING,D10×D10

securing bolt

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code TABLE FIXTURE,50A
Z BRACKET,50A
MOTOR, 57.0W ASSY 659236001
bolt, socket M6×12(3pcs.)
washer, spring 2-6(3pcs.)
washer, plain m6(3pcs.)
1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.1.3.4:pm6
2.1.3.4 - 2E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.3.6 U,V axes motor replacement (1/3)

U axis
1. Standard: Open the control panel.
EU: Remove the screw, pan 5×8 (4pcs.) and remove the OPERATION BOX
COVER.

2. Lower the Z axis to - stroke.

3. Turn off the power and the breaker.

4. Remove the bolt, sockets 4×8 (2pcs.). Remove the NIPPLE BASE STAY.

5. Remove bolt, sockets 5×8 (2pcs.) and remove the MOTOR COVER.

6. Remove the connector for the MOTOR, 15.4W ASSY.

bolt, sockets 4×8

NIPPLE BASE STAY

MOTOR, 15.4W ASSY

02C16.doc MOTOR COVER

bolt, sockets 5×8

Replacement parts Tools to be

Name Parts code

MOTOR, 15.4W ASSY 659046001


1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.1.3.6:pm6
2.1.3.6 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.3.6 U,V motor replacement (2/3)

U axis
7. Loosen the securing bolt on the ball screw side for the COUPLING, D5×D6.

8. Loosen the bolt, sockets 3×8 (2 pcs.)

9. Pull the MOTOR, 15.4W ASSY horizontally and remove it.

10. Remove the COUPLING, D5×D6 from the MOTOR, 15.4W ASSY.

11. Replace the MOTOR, 15.4W ASSY with a new one and reverse steps from 3.to 8.
*The tightening torque for the COUPLING, D5×D6 is tightening torque 0.8 Nm.(0.8 N/m)

12. Set the origin offset value and grid shift value.
Refer to 2.3.1.5 UV axes origin offset and Grid shift value setting.

securing bolt

COUPLING,D5×D6

02C17.doc

bolt, sockets 3×8 MOTOR, 15.4W ASSY

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.1.3.6:pm6
2.1.3.6 - 2E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.3.6 U,V motor replacement(3/3)

V axis
1. Remove the Z UNDER COVER.
Refer 2.1.1.2 Z U V cover Removal.

2. Move the machining tank to the Y axis + stroke end.

3. Turn off the power and the breaker.

4. Remove the connector for the MOTOR, 15.4W ASSY.

5. Loosen securing screws (2 pcs.) on the ball screw side of the COUPLING, D5×D6.

6. Remove bolt, sockets 3×8 (2 pcs.)

7. Pull the MOTOR, 15.4W ASSY, horizontally, and remove it.

8. Remove the COUPLING, D5×D6 from the MOTOR, 15.4W ASSY

9. Replace the MOTOR, 15.4W ASSY with a new one and reverse steps from 4 to 8 to
secure it.
* The tightening torque for the COUPLING, D5×D6 is 0.8Nm. (8.2kg f cm).

10.Set the origin offset value and the grid shift value.
Refer to the 2.3.1.5 UV axes origin offset , Grid shift value setting.

MOTOR, 15.4W ASSY

Replacement parts Tools to be

Name Parts code

MOTOR, 15.4W ASSY 659046001


1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.1.3.6:pm6
2.1.3.6 - 3E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.3.7 U,V axes ball screw replacement (1/2)

1. Remove the motor.


Refer to 2.1.3.6 Z U V motor Replacement.

2. Remove the tube, lylon for lubrication.

3. Remove bolt, sockets 4×12 (2pcs.) securing the BEARING HOLDER.

4. Remove bolt, sockets 4×12 (4pcs.) securing the ball screw nut.

5. Remove the MOTOR BRACKET and BALL SCREW, L160 with the BEARING
HOLDER.

6. Remove the screw, pan 4×8 and remove the STOPPER.

BALL SCREW, L160 BEARINGHOLDER

bolt, sockets 4×12 bolt, sockets 4×12


securing the ball screw nut
securing the BEARING
HOLDER

02C18.doc
MOTORBRACKET

Replacement parts Tools to be

Name
Fine U nut M8× 0.75 tie jig
Parts code

BALLSCREW,L160 659042001
RETAININGRING,C6 048060142
1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.1.3.7:pm6
2.1.3.7 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.3.8 CABLE GUIDE KOL03 replacement (1/2)

1. Remove the SADDLE COVER, FR, SADDLE COVER, L and BELLOWS, 576× 502.
Refer to 2.1.1.1 XY axes cover removal

2. Remove the screw, pan( s/p washer) 5×8 and remove the COVER, RB50A.
Remove the EMC side cover 2 for EU use machine.

3. Cut the cable tie fixes the cable.

screw, pan( s/p washer) 5×8

COVER, RB50A

02C81.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be

Name Parts code

CABLEGUIDE KOL03 659171001

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.1.3.8:pm6
2.1.3.8-1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.3.8 CABLE GUIDE KOL03 replacement (2/2)

4. Move the X axis to the position where the tightening screw on the lower side can be
loosened.
Remove the screw, pan( s/p washer) 5×8 (2pcs.) and remove the screw, pan 4×20 (2pcs.)

5. Pull out the CABLE GUIDE KOL03 with CABLE BEARER STAY.
Cut the slacked part of the cable tie to pull out the cable.

6. Remove the screw, pan 4×20 (2pcs.) and replace the CABLE GUIDE KOL03 with a new
one.

7. Reverse steps from 1.to 5.to secure it.

screw, pan( s/p washer) 5×8

CABLE BEARER STAY

cable tie
slacked part

screw, pan 4×20 02C33.doc

CABLEGUIDE KOL03

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.1.3.8:pm6
2.1.3.8-2E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.5.6 Drain valve packing replacement (1/2)

1. Move the machining tank in jog operation and stop it at the position indicated
below.

2. Turn off the power and the breaker.

3. Remove the screw, pan M4×8 (2pcs.) and the TERMINAL COVER, 50A.

4. Remove the connector for the SOLENOID, 6ER 67.5.

5. Remove the bolt, sockets SUS 4×8, and take out the SOLENOID STAY.

6. Remove the PACKING, D57 from the DRAIN VALVE, D56 and replace it.

7. Reverse steps from 3.to 6.to secure it.

ERMINALCOVER,50A

screw, pan M4X8

02C20.doc

1999-11- 5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual:2.1.5.6:pm6
2.1.5.6 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.5.6 Drain valve packing replacement(2/2)

SOLENOID,6ER67.5

DRAIN VALVE, D56

PACKING,D57

02C22.doc

SOLENOID STAY

bolt, sockets SUS 4×8

02C21.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code

PACKING D57 659300001

1999-11- 5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual:2.1.5.6:pm6
2.1.5.6 - 2E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.5.7 Solenoid, 6ER 67.5 replacement

1. Move the machining tank in jog operation and stop it at the position indicated
below.

2. Turn off the power and the breaker.

3. Remove the screw, pan 4×8 (2pcs.) and the TERMINAL COVER, 50A.
Refer to 2.1.5.6 Drain valve packing replacement

4. Remove the connector for the SOLENOID, 6ER 67.5.

5. Remove the nut, 2 M 5(2pcs.) and then remove the washer, plain M 5 and the
washer, spring 2-5.

6. Remove the SOLENOID, 6ER 67.5 as indicated below, then replace it.

7. Reverse the steps from 3. to 6.

Remove the TERMINAL washer, plain M 5


COVER, 50A from this washer, spring 2-5
side.

nut, 2 M 5

SOLENOID, 6ER 67.5

1. move.
02C20.doc

3. take out

2. tuen
02C23.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code

SOLENOIDE 6ER67.5 659304001

1999-9-15 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual:2.1.5.7:pm6
2.1.5.7 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.1.5.8 Machining tank removal (2/2)

7. Remove the water supply hose and main drain hose ASSY.

8. Remove the TABLE COVER, FR and TABLE COVER, RE.


Refer to the 2.1.1.1 XY axes cover removal

9. Remove the bolt, socket M8×35 (6 pieces), washer, INSULATION WASHER


T3N , and the INSULATION COLLAR A.

10. Close the door of the machining tank, and then pull the machining tank
horizontally.
This operation must be performed by two persons. Make sure not to bend the
slide seal.

11. Place the machining tank on the cloth prepared in step 1).

1999-9-15 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual:2.1.5.8:pm6
2.1.5.8 - 2E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.6.3 Wire breakage detector replacement

Remove the screw, pan M4×8 (4 pieces), and pull the TENSION UNIT 50A out
from the wire case.
Make sure to pull the tension unit out slowly, since it is connected inside the wire
case.

Remove the connectors (2 pieces).

3. Remove the screws, pan M3×5 (2 pieces), and the photo coupler PCB from the
SENSORPBCSETTINGPLATE.

4. Replace the photo coupler PCB with a new one, and reverse steps 1. to 3. as
shown in the drawing below.
* Make sure the photo coupler PCB is mounted in the correct direction.

screws, pan M3×5

Photo coupler PCB

SENSORPBCSETTINGPLATE

Set the frange to upside


Connector

around 0.3mm

02C45.doc

Wire case

screw, pan M4×8

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code

PHOTOCOUPLERPCB 633814001
ASSY

2.1.6.3 - 1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.6.3:pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.6.4 Powder brake replacement (1/2)

1. Remove the screw, pan M4×8 (4 pieces), and pull the TENSION UNIT 50A out
from the wire case.
Make sure to pull the TENSION UNIT 50A out slowly, since it is connected inside the
wire case.

2. Remove the connectors (2 pieces).

3. Remove the SIRING ,EXTENSION 8×35.

4. Remove the screw, pan M4×8 (2 pieces) and the SENSOR PCB SETTING PLATE.

5. Remove the set screw, socket (CP) M4×5 and the BOSS, D20.
*Make sure not to bend the INTERRUPTER, D36.
In the case of an automatic wire threading device, remove the screw, pan M4×8,
screw, pan M4×30, and the WIRE COVER.

SENSORPCBSETTINGPLATE
Connector INTERRUPTER,D36

Set Screw Socket


SIRING,EXTENSION 8×35
(CP) M 4 ×5
BOSS,D20

POWDER BRAKE, 10K

02C45.doc
Set Screw Socket
(CP) M 5 ×8
Screw, Pan M 4 ×8 URETHANEROLLER,D70
Screw, Pan M 4 ×8
Screw, Pan M 5 ×8

1999-11-5 2.1.6.4 - 1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.6.4:pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.6.4 Powder brake replacement(2/2)

6. Remove the bolt, socket M4×5 (2 pcs.) and the URETHANE ROLLER, D70.

7. Remove the screw, pan M5×8 (4 pieces) and the POWDER BRAKE, 10K.

8. Replace the POWDER BRAKE, 10K with a new one. Reverse steps 1. to 7. to secure it.
Refer to 2.1.6.3 Wire breakage detector replacement.

9. Adjust the wire tension.


Refer to 2.3.2.1 Wire tension adjustment.

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code

POWDER BRAKE 10K 634196000

1999-11-5 2.1.6.4 - 2E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.6.4:pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.6.5 Wire Drive Motor Replacement

1. Remove the screw, pan (s/p washer ) M5×8. Then, remove the COVER RB50A.
For EU use, remove the EMC SIDE COVER 2.
Refer to 2.1.1.6 Side cover removal

2. Remove the connector for the SP MOTOR, 40W

3. Remove the Screw, Pan M 6×60 and remove the SP MOTOR, 40W.

4. Loosen the set screw, socket (CP) M5×8. Remove the SPUR GEAR, MIZ56 from
the SP MOTOR, 40W.

5. Replace the SP MOTOR, 40W. Reverse steps from 1. to 4. to secure it.

screw, pan (s/p washer ) M5×8

COVER RB50A

Connector
SP MOTOR, 40W
02C82.doc Set Screw, Socket (CP) M4×5

Spur Gear, MIZ56


Screw Pan, 6×60

02C46.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code

SP MOTOR, 40W 659258001


1999-11-5 2.1.6.5 - 1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.6.5:pm.6
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.6.6 Wire Cutting Motor Replacement

1. Remove the screw, pan (s/p washer ) 5×8 DB. Then, remove the COVER RB50A.
For EU use, remove the EMC SIDE COVER 2.
Refer to 2.1.1.6 Side cover removal

2. Remove the connector for the SP MOTOR, 25W.

3. Remove the bolt, socket 5×12 and remove the SP MOTOR, 25W.

4. Loosen the set screw, socket (CP)M 5×8. Remove the SPUR GEAR, MIZ56 from the SP
MOTOR, 25W.

5. Replace the SP MOTOR, 25W. Reverse steps from 1. to 4. to secure it.


The space to mount the SPUR GEAR, MIZ56 is indicated below.

screw, pan (s/p washer ) M5×8

COVER RB50A

Set Screw, Socket


(CP) M4×5
SPUR GEAR, MIZ56
Socket, Bolt 5×12
SP MOTOR, 25W
02C82.doc

26

Connector

02C47.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code
SP MOTOR, 25W 659259001
1999-11-5 2.1.6.6 - 1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.6.6:pm.6
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.6.7 The wire collection box over flow sensor replacement

1. Remove the connector from the PHOTO SENSOR 2.

2. Remove the PHOTO SENSOR 2 securing screw (2 pcs.).

3. Replace the PHOTO SENSOR 2 with the new one.

4. Reverse steps from 1. to 2. to secure it.

Securing Screw
for the PHOTO SENSOR 2

PHOTO SENSOR 2

connector

02C48.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code

PHOTO SENSOR 2 659271001

1999-11-5 2.1.6.7 - 1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.6.7:pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.7 Upper and Lower wire guide


2.1.7.1. Upper wire guide dissembly and assembly
1. Pick the cap on the bottom side of the TELESCOPIC PIPE GUIDE STAY
and lift it up to remove.

2. Keep pulling up the TELESCOPIC PIPE GUIDE STAY.


Pull the O ring attached to the cap inside of the PIPE, D13×L195 to hold it.

3. Loosen the joint part of the UNIVERSAL ELBOW, UEF4F and the HALF UNION 1/8
and remove the tube.
(The ELBOW UNION 6-1/8 is included for the wire automatic threading device.)

4. Remove the bolt, socket SUS 5×30 and remove the LOAD DISPATCH CABLE U1
ASSY and LOAD DISPATCH CABLE U2 ASSY.

5. While holding the upper wire guide with an one hand , remove the RUBBER CAP
D8 (4pcs.) and bolt, sockets SUS 4×16(4pcs.). Remove t the upper wire guide from
the QUIL.

6. Remove the bolt, socket SUS 4×16(4pcs.) and the INSULATION PLATE 86×55×20.

7. Reverse steps from 1. to 6. to mount it.

8. Operate the vertical alignment.


Refer to Operation Manual 6.2.2.5 Vertical Alignments.

bolt, socket SUS 5×30 bolt, socket SUS 4×16


LOAD DISPATCH CABLE U1 ASSY
LOAD DISPATCH CABLE U2 ASSY INSULATION
PLATE 86×55×20

PIPE,D13×L195

TELESCO PIC PIPE GUIDE STAY

02C49.doc
bolt, socket SUS 4×16
ELBOW UNION 6-1/8

HALF UNION RUBBER CAP D8

1999-11-5 2.1.7.1 - 1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.7.1.pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.7.3 Joint plug removal

1. Remove the lower GND cable from the lower arm.


Refer to the Installation manual :8.8 Maintenance Operation List
3. Upper / lower GND cable replacement.

2. Remove the lower wire guide section from the lower arm.
Refer to 2.1.7.2 Lower wire guide unit disassembly and assembly.

3. Remove the PLUG D10.

4. Pull the JOINT PLUG, D55 forward and remove it.


If the JOINT PLUG, D55 cannot be removed, secure the lower wire guide section
to the lower arm using the set screw, socket M4×8, and then pull the lower
wire guide section. If still cannot be removed, pull the JOINT PLUG, D55
while cooling it with an electronic parts cooling spray and so on.

5. Replace the Lower Arm Cover with a new one if it is damaged.


Refer to the Installation manual :8.8 Maintenance Operation List
5. Lower Arm Cover Replacement.

Lower Arm

back-up band

JOINT PLUG, D55

O ring

PLUG D10

Lower Arm Cover

02C51.jpg

lower GND cable lower GND cable

wier pass pipe

1999-11-5 2.1.7.3 - 1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.7:.3.pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.8 Water Supply and Water Supply Unit


2.1.8.1 Water solenoid valve disassembly(1/2)

1. Turn off the breaker of the machine.

2. Drain the wtaer inside of the pipes.

3. Disassemble the water SOLENOID VALVE,2P15A in the order shown in the drawing (2/2).
When the water solenoid valve is disassembled, machining water will leak from
the piping.Use a cloth to absorb this water.

4. Clean a diaphragm and a body which consist of valve with agent


such as synthetic detergent or kerosine.
Use water to wash O ring. Never use organic solvent to wash parts.

5. Reverse steps 1. and 4. to secure it.

*When mounting the stuffing to the body, pay attention to the direction. for IN
and OUT.
*Match the arrow on the body to the right direction to mount the SOLENOID
VALVE,2P15A.

for upper and


lowerjet
SOLENOIDVALVE,2P15A

for flushing

for machining tank


water supply
02C52.doc

arrow on the body

1999-12-16 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.8.1:pm.6


2.1.8.1- 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.8.1 Water solenoid valve disassembly(2/2)

1: nut
spacer
identification plate

2:coil assy

wave washer

3:core assy

plunger spring

plunger assy
02C53-1
O ring

4:body bolt

staffing

diaphragm

O ring

gasket

body

02C53-2

1999-12-16 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.8.1:pm.6


2.1.8.1- 2E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.8.2 Water solenoid valve replacement

1. Remove hose, tube and wires connected to SUPPLY VALVE ASSY.

2. Remove the screw, pan (S/P, washer) 5×8 and remove the SUPPLY VALVE ASSY.

3. Remove the U BOLT, 3/4 and remove the PIPING SETTING PLATE.

4. Remove the piping as indicated below.

5. Replace the SOLENOID V2P 15A with a new one.


Make sure to match the arrow on the body to the right direction to mount the SOLE-
NOID V2P 15A. (Refer to the figure indicated below.)

6. Reverse steps from 1.to 5.

SUPPLY VALVE ASSY

screw, pan (S/P, washer) 5×8

U BOLT, 3/4
02C78.doc
arrow on the body
PIPING SETTING PLATE SOLENOID V2P 15A

Replacement parts Tools to be

Name Parts code

SOLENOID V2P 15A 659153001

1999-11-5 2.1.8.2-1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.8.2.:pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.8.3 Ejector solenoid valve dissembles(1/2)

Automatic wire threading device use only


1. Turn off the breaker .

2. Drain the machining water.

3. Disassemble the SOLENOID V 2P 8A as following numbers indicated on the next page.


When the water solenoid valve is disassembled , machining water will leak from the
piping. Use a cloth to absorb the water.

4. Clean a diaphragm and a body which consist of valve with agent such as synthetic
detergent or kerosine.
Use water to wash O ring. Never use organic solvent to wash parts.

5. Reverse the disassemble steps to mount it.


*When mounting the diaphragm assembly on the body, fit the diaphragm completely
into the groove part of the body. And also Set the diaphragm on the OUT side to
mount it.
* Match the arrow on the body to the right direction to mount the SOLENOID V2P 8A.

IN OUT

SOLENOIDV2P8A

02C54.doc

1999-12-16 2.1.8.3-1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.8.3.:pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.8.3 Ejector solenoid valve dissembles(2/2)

1:nut

identification plate
02C79-1.jpg

2:coil assy

02C79-2.jpg

3:bonnet base

wave washer

4:core assy

spring

plunger

5:diaphragm assy

body
02C79-3.jpg

1999-12-16 2.1.8.3-2E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.8.3.:pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.8.4 Ion exchange valve replacement

1. Turn off the breaker of the machine.

2. Remove the wiring of the WATER VALVE 2PDC 24V.

3. Remove the hose connected to the WATER VALVE 2PDC24V and remove the
ion exchange valve.

4. Remove the hose connected to WATER VALVE 2PDC 24V.

5. Remove the screw, pan M5×8(2pcs.) and remove the PIPING ATTACH PLATE
as whole.

6. Remove the WATER VALVE 2P DC 24V.

7. Reverse steps 1. to 5. to mount a new WATER VALVE 2PDC 24V .


*Tighten the WATER VALVE 2PDC 24V with a torque, 3.9 Nn (40 kgf cm) or less.

hose

wiring

WATER VALVE
2P DC 24V

screw, pan M5×8

PIPING ATTACH PLATE

hose
02C55.doc
RELIEFVALVE2PDC24V

Replacement parts Tools to be

Name Parts code

WATER VALVE 2PDC 24V 659153001

1999-11-5 2.1.8.4-1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.8.4.:.pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.8.5 Relief valve replacement

1. Turn off the breaker of the machine.

2. Remove the hose connected to the WATER VALVE 2PDC 24V and remove the
ion exchange valve.

3. Remove the hose connected to RELIEF VALVE P1.2.

4. Remove the screw, pan M5×8(2pcs.) and remove the PIPING ATTACH PLATE
as whole.

5. Remove the RELIEF VALVE P1.2

6. Reverse steps 1. to 5. to mount a new RELIEF VALVE P1.2.

hose

wiring

WATER VALVE
2P DC 24V

screw, pan M5×8

PIPING ATTACH PLATE

hose
02C55.doc
RELIEFVALVE2PDC24V

Replacement parts Tools to be

Name Parts code

RELIEFVALVE2PDC24V 632751001

1999-11-5 2.1.8.5-1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.8.5.:.pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.8.6 Water level sensor replacement

1. Remove the hose tube and wire connected to the SUPPLY VALVE ASSY.

2. Remove the screw, pan (S/P washer) M5×8 (2pcs.) and remove the SUPPLY VALVE
ASSY.

3. Remove the U BOLT, 3/4 (3pcs,) and PIPING SETTING PLATE.

4. Remove the piping as indicated below.

5. Replace the CONSTANT FLOW VALVE, H20L with a new one.


Make sure the CONSTANT FLOW VALVE, H20L is placed correctly before mount-
ing it.
(Mount it after making the arrow on the body faced up.)

6. Reverse steps from 1. to 5.to mount it.

SUPPLY VALVE ASSY

screw, pan (S/P washer)


M5×8

U BOLT, 3/4

02C56.doc

PIPING SETTING PLATE


CONSTANT FLOW VALVE, H20L

Replacement parts Tools to be

Name Parts code

CONSTANT FLOW 632961001


VALVE, H20L
1999-11-5 2.1.8.6-1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.8.6.:.pm.6
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.8.7 Pump mechanical seal Replacement (1/4)

Filterpumpmechanicalsealreplacement
1. Remove the filter pump from the water supply unit.
Refer to 2.1.8.1 Pump replacement.

2. Remove the screw and remove the coupling guard.

3. Loosen the bolt, socket (4 pcs.), and then remove the coupling.

4. Loosen the bolts (4 pcs.), and then remove the motor.

5. Remove the C-shape stop ring and key from the pump shaft.

6. Attach a band or rope to the circumference of the pump to be secured.

7. Loosen the nuts (3 pcs.) from the fastening band, and then remove the pump
from the pump head.

8. Remove the mechanical seal (rotaion) from the top of the pump shaft.

9. Remove the mechanical seal (fixed) from the pump head.

10. Mount parts as follows:


Clean the shaft and the surface for attachment, and then attach the new mechanical seal.

11. Mount the pump to the pump head, and remove the band or rope attached in step 6.

12. Reverse step 2) to 5) to mount the motor, and equally tighten the bolt, socket (4 pcs.)
for the coupling guard.

13. Manually turn the coupling to make sure the coupling can easily be rotated.
If the coupling cannot rotate, retry steps 11. to 13..

14. Install the filter pump onto the water supply unit. And manually turn the coupling
to make sure the coupling can easily be rotated again.

Replacement parts Tools to be

Name Parts code Hose band (for Ø90)


Silicon grease
MECHANICAL SEAL KIT V04 634886001
Soapy water

1999-11-5 2.1.8.7-1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.8.7.pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.8.7 Pump mechanical seal Replacement (2/4)

Machining pump mechanical seal replacement


1. Remove the machining pump from the water supply unit.
Refer to 2.1.8.8 Pump replacement.

2. Loosen the screw. Remove the coupling guard.

3. Loosen the bolt, socket (4 pcs.), and then remove the coupling.

4. Loosen the bolts (4 pcs.), and then remove the motor.

5. Remove the C-shape stop ring and key from the pump shaft.

6. Attach a band or rope to the circumference of the pump to be secured.

7. Loosen the nuts (3 pcs.) from the fastening band, and then remove the pump
from the pump head.

8. Remove the mechanical seal (rotaion) from the top of the pump shaft.

9. Remove the mechanical seal (fixed) from the pump head.

10. Mount parts as follows:


Clean the shaft and the surface for attachment, and then attach the new mechanical seal.

11. Mount the pump to the pump head, and remove the band or rope attached in step 6.

12. Reverse step 2) to 5) to mount the motor, and equally tighten the bolt, socket (4 pcs.)
for the coupling guard.

13. Manually turn the coupling to make sure the coupling can easily be rotated.
If the coupling cannot rotate, retry steps 11) to 13).

14. Install the machining pump onto the water supply unit.
And manually turn the coupling to make sure the coupling can easily be rotated again.

Replacement parts Tools to be

Name Parts code


Hose band (for Ø115)
Silicon grease
MECHANICAL SEAL KIT V22 634891001 Soapy water

1999-11-5 2.1.8.7-2E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.8.7.pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.8.7 Pump mechanical seal Replacement (3/4)

02C57.jpg

1999-11-5 2.1.8.7-3E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.8.7.pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.8.7 Pump mechanical seal Replacement (4/4)

No. Paet name Material Quantlty Remarks


002 Suction casing 304 Stainless steel 1
003 Discharge bracket Castiron 1
005-1 Intermediate casing 304 Stainless steel Depends on model
005-2 Interstage casing 304 Stainless steel 2(3)
005-3 Intermediate casing body 304 Stainless steel Depends on model
021 Impeller 304 Stainless steel N
030 Shaft 316 Stainless steel 1
040 Bearing sleeve SiC/rubber 1(2)
041-1 Shafu sleeve 304 Stainless steel Depends on model For sdjustment
041-2 Shafu sleeve 304 Stainless steel Depends on model Intermediase
041-3 Shafu sleeve 304 Stainless steel Depends on model For bearing
041-4 Shafu sleeve 304 Stainless steel 1 Ø50 mm only
049 U-nut 304 Stainless steel 1
050 Bearing SiC/rubber 1(2)
057 Bearing casing 304 Stainless steel 1(2)
107 Liner ring PTFE/SS N
111 Mechanical seal SiC/SiC 1
115-1 O-ring Rubber 1 For bracket
115-2 O-ring Rubber Depends on model For intermediate casing
115-3 O-ring Rubber 1 For flange
120-1 Hexbolt Steel 4 For motor
120-2 Hex socket head bolt 304 Stainless steel 4 For companion flange
120-3 Hex socket head bolt Alloy steel 4 For coupling
121 Fastening band 304 Stainless steel 3/4 4 if Ø 65 mm
128 Hex nut 304 Stainless steel 3/4 4 if Ø 65 mm
130-1 Screw 304 Stainless steel 4 For guard
130-2 Screw 304 Stainless steel 3/4 4 if Ø 65 mm
135 Flat washer 304 Stainless steel 3/4 4 if Ø 65 mm
136 Shaft washer 304 Stainless steel 2(3)
137 Spacer 304 Stainless steel 1
139-1 Key 420 Stainless steel 1 For motor
139-2 Key 420 Stainless steel 1 For pump
140 Coupling Carbon steel 1set
150 Shim PTFE 2(4)
219 Companion flange Castiron 1
244 Strainer 304 Stainless steel 1
245 Coupling guard Steel 2
274-1 Snap ring 304 Stainless steel 1 For motor shaft end
274-2 Snap ring 304 Stainless steel 1 For pump shaft end
274-3 Snap ring 304 Stainless steel 1 For retaining sleeve
800 Motor Aluminum,ohter 1 Totally enclosed,fan-cooled

1999-11-5 2.1.8.7-4E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.8.7.pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.8.8 Pump Replacement (1/2)

FilterPumpReplacement
1. Move the water supply unit to the position where the operation can be done.

2. Open the terminal box of the filter PUMP, 25VTP6/19, and then remove the cable.

3. Remove the union of the filter PUMP, 25VTP6/19.

Loosen the bolt, socket M8×20.(4pcs.)

4. Lift up the filter PUMP, 25VTP6/19.

5. Reverse steps 1. to 5. to reset the filter pump.

6. Press the [WATER] key, and make sure no water is leaking.


Also, check if the pump is rotating into the right direction.
(Check the roation direction from the top of the pump.)

top of the pump. terminal box

union
PUMP, 25VTP6/19

bolt, socket M8×20

02C58.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be

Name Parts code

PUMP,25VTP6/19 659332001

1999-11-5 2.1.8.8-1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.8.8.:.pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.8.9 Flexible Tube Replacement (1/2)

1. Remove the flexible tube.

2. Replace the flexible tube with a new one to mount it.


*The seal tape is not necessary to mount the flexible tube. Mount it without using screws.
*Refer to the figure (2/2) indicated below to mount the flexible tube.

3. Press the [WATER] key and make sure no water is leaking.

FLEXIBLE
TUBE,L800

FLEXIBLE
TUBE,L400

02C60.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be

Name Parts code

FLEXIBLETUBE,L800 659328001
FLEXIBLETUBE,L400 659329001
1999-11-5 2.1.8.9- 1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.8.9.:.pm.6
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.8.9 Flexible Tube Replacement (2/2)

Over 20 mm (straight part)


FLEXIBLE TUBE,L800

seal tape is unnecesary

Over 20 mm (straight part)

Over the radius 30

02C80.doc

Over 20 mm (straight part)


A way of water out

Over the radius 30 seal tape is unnecesary

FLEXIBLE TUBE,L400

02C61.doc
Over 20 mm (straight part)

nipple

1999-11-5 2.1.8.9- 2E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.8.9.:.pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.9.1 Automatic wire threading device removal and installation (2/2)

5. Remove the screw, pan M4×8(4 pcs.) and the automatic wire threading device.
* Reverse steps 1. to 5. to install the automatic wire threading device.
In this case, pay attention to following items.

* Secure the automatic wire threading device with screws (4 pieces) on the from t cover
after making sure the automatic wire threading device has been set with the
positioning pins on the front cover.
* After completing the installation, call the <MOTION CHECK> screen, output signals,
and check the operations of each actuator.
The actuators to be checked are: the electrode movement solenoid,
roller open/close solenoid, wire feed motor 1, and wire feed motor 2.
Refer to Installation manual 6.6 Motion Check

NOTE
The operations in motion check are as follows:
* "R-sol. (electrode)" automatically goes off 5 seconds after being pressed.
* "Turning on R-sol. (pinch roll)" sets the roller open/close solenoids 1 and 2.
In this case, the operation of roller open/close solenoid 1 begins after 2.
The direct. change motor automatically goes off 5 seconds after being pressed.
* "Pressing guide movement motor" moves the guide by one stroke
(from the machining position to the unloading position; or from the unloading
position to the machining position).
If the limit switch malfunctions, the guide movement motor continues operating
for 5 seconds.

screw, pan M4×8

wire feed motor 1

R-sol.(electrode)

wire feed motor 2

Turning on R-sol. (pinch roll)

02C63.doc

1999-11-5 2.1.9.1- 2E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.9.1:.pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.9.2 Pinch roller solenoid valve and replacement

1. Remove the automatic wire threading device.


Refer to 2.1.9.1 Automatic wire threading device removal and installation.

2. Use nippers to cut the band that bundles the cables and the parts to be replaced.
Make sure not to cut the cables.

3. Remove the retaining ring, pinch roller, and the lever.

4. Remove the nuts (2 pieces) and pinch roller solenoids 1 and 2.

5. Replace the pinch roller solenoids with new ones. Reverse steps 1. to 4.
to reset the automatic wire threading device.

6. Check the operation of the automatic wire threading device.


Refer to 2.1.9.1 Automatic wire threading device removal and installation.
lever
pinch roller solenoids 1 ritaining ring

pinch roller solenoids 1 pinch roller


nut

pinch roller
pinch roller solenoids 2
nut ritaining ring
pinch roller solenoids 2 02C64.doc
lever

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code
ROTARYSOLENOID ASSY,#4-3 634608001
(pinch roller solenoids 1)
ROTARYSOLENOID,#4-2 632983000
(pinch roller solenoids 2)
CABLETIE:SKB-1M 631640000
1999-11-5 2.1.9.2- 1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.9.2:.pm.6
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.9.3 Guide movement motor replacement

1. Remove the automatic wire threading device.


Refer to 2.1.9.1 Automatic wire threading device removal and installation.

2. Use nippers to cut the band that bundles the cables and the parts to be replaced.
Make sure not to cut the cables.

3. Remove the screws (2 pcs.) and the guide movement motor.

4. Replace the guide movement motor with a new one.


Reverse steps 1. to 3. to reset the automatic wire threading device.

5. Check the operation of the automatic wire threading device.


Refer to 2.1.9.1 Automatic wire threading device removal and installation

screw guide movement motor

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code
SYNCHRONOUS MOTOR 632807000
(guide movement motor)
CABLE TIE:SKB-1M 631640000

1999-11-5 2.1.9.3- 1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.9.3:.pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.9.4 Wire feed motor replacement

1. Remove the automatic wire threading device.


Refer to 2.1.9.1 Automatic wire threading device removal and installation.

2. Use nippers to cut the band that bundles the cables and the parts to be replaced.
Make sure not to cut the cables.

3. Remove the nuts (4 pcs.) and STEPPING MOTOR ASSY, KH42A and STEPPING
MOTOR ASSY, KH42B.

4. Replace STEPPING MOTOR ASSY, KH42A and STEPPING MOTOR ASSY, KH42B
with new ones.

5. Tighten nuts (4pcs.) while holding the wire feed motors so that the belt are not bent.

6. Reverse steps 1. to 2. to reset the automatic wire threading device.

7. Check the operation of the automatic wire threading device.


Refer to 2.1.9.1 Automatic wire threading device removal and installation.
nut
belt
wire feed motors 1
(STEPPING MOTOR ASSY, KH42A)

wire feed motors 1

wire feed motors 2


(STEPPING MOTOR ASSY, KH42B) belt
nut
wire feed motors 2 02C66.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code
STEPPINGMOTORASSY,KH42B 659232001
(wire feed motors 1)
STEPPING MOTOR ASSY, KH42A 659231001
(wire feed motors 2)
CABLETIE:SKB-1M 631640000
1999-11-5 2.1.9.4- 1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.9.4:.pm.6
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.9.5 Wire electrode movement solenoid valve replacement

1. Remove the automatic wire threading device.


Refer to 2.1.9.1 Automatic wire threading device removal and installation.

2. Use nippers to cut the band that bundles the cables and the parts to be replaced.
Make sure not to cut the cables.

3. Remove the lock bolt, ELECTRODE HOLD, and the thrust washer.

4. Remove the nuts (2 pcs.) and the electrode movement solenoid.

5. Replace the electrode movement solenoid with a new one.


Reverse steps 1. to 4. to reset the automatic wire threading device.

6. Check the operation of the automatic wire threading device.


Refer to 2.1.9.1 Automatic wire threading device removal and installation.

thrust washer

lock bolt
1
2
P

1
2
N

02C67.doc

electrode movement solenoid


(ROTARY SOLENOID, #3)

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code
ROTARY SOLENOID, #3 632805000
(electrode movement solenoid)
CABLETIE:SKB-1M 631640000

2.1.9.5- 1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.9.5.:pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.9. 6 Threading limit switch replacement

1. Remove the automatic wire threading device.


Refer to 2.1.9.1 Automatic wire threading device removal and installation.

2. Use nippers to cut the band that bundles the cables and the LIMIT SWITCH
to be replaced. Make sure not to cut the cables.

3. Remove the screws (2 pieces) and turntable limit switch.


Make sure not to drop the screws supporting the nut.

4. Replace the turntable limit switch with a new one.


Reverse steps 1. to 3. to reset the automatic wire threading device.

5. Adjust the turn table limit switch.


Refer to 2.3.3.1 Threading limit switch adjustment.

6. Check the operation of the automatic wire threading device.


Refer to 2.1.9.1 Automatic wire threading device removal and installation.
screw

drain side threading limit switch


(LIMIT SWICH ASSY,A)

screw

02C68.doc
machining side threading limit switch
(LIMIT SWICH ASSY,B)

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code
LIMIT SWICH ASSY,A 634064000
(drain side threading limit switch)
LIMIT SWICH ASSY,B 634065000
(machining side threading limit switch)
CABLETIE:SKB-1M 631640000
1999-11-5 2.1.9.6- 1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.9.6:.pm.6
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.9. 7. Threading wire detector replacement

1. Remove the automatic wire threading device.


Refer to 2.1.9.1 Automatic wire threading device removal and installation.

2. Use nippers to cut the band that bundles the cables to the wire detector to be
replaced.
Make sure not to cut the cables.

3. Remove the sensor fixing screws (2 pieces) and the wire detector.

4. Replace the wire detector with a new one.


Reverse steps 1. to 3. to reset the automatic wire threading device.

5. Adjust the wire detector position.


Refer to 2.3.3.2 Threading wire detector adjustment.

6. Check the operation of the automatic wire threading device.


Refer to 2.1.9.1 Automatic wire threading device removal and installation.

sensor fixing screw

02C69.doc

PHOTO SENSOR

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code
PHOTO SENSOR 632806000
(wire detector) NNNNNNN
CABLE TIE:SKB-1M 631640000

1999-11-5 2.1.9.7- 1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.9.7:.pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.10 B axis unit


2.1.10.1 B axis Brush Block replacement

1. Remove the screw, pan M4×8(6pcs.) and the GEAR BOX B COVER.

2. Remove the screw, pan M4×8 (2pcs. and 2sets)and the BRUSH ASSY (2sets).

3. Remove the screw, pan (S/P washer) M4×8 and remove the dog.

4. Remove the bolt, socket M4×20(3pcs.) and the BRUSH BLOCK D54 for replacement.

5. Mount the dog and then adjust it.


Refor to 2.3.4.1 B axis home position detection dog adjustment

6. Reverse steps 1.to 5.to mount it.


*Install the BRUSH ASSY so that the circumference of the BRUSH BLOCK D54
completely touches the brush.

screw, pan M4×8

BRUSH ASSY

BRUSH BLOCK D54

dog

screw, pan M4×8


BRUSH
ASSY
02C70.doc
bolt, socket M4×20
screw, pan M4×8

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code
BRUSH BLOCK D54 634109000

1999-11-5 2.1.10.1- 1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.10.1:.pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.10.2 B axis oil seal replacement

1. Place the B axis on the workbench so that the tip of the spindle is facing up.

2. Remove the bolt, socket M4×12 (4pcs.) and the SEAL HOLDING PLATE.

3. Mount the M4 bolt, socket (2pcs.) to the taps of the OIL SEAL BRACKET, hold
them and then pull out the OIL SEAL BRACKET.

4. Take out the oil seals from the OIL SEAL BRACKET and then replace them.
Make sure to replace the two oil seals at the same time.
5. When replacing, grease the lips of the oil seals.
Check whether the O ring surrounding the OIL SEAL BRACKET is damaged or not.
If it is damaged, replace it.

6. Remove the bolt, socket M4 (2pcs.) mounted in step 3. and reverse steps 1.
to 3. for mounting.

OIL SEAL, AC2066E0


bolt, socket M4×12

SEAL HOLDING PLATE

bolt, socket M4
OIL SEAL BRACKET

02C71.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code
OIL SEAL, AC2066E0 632851000
O RING, G65 081065770

1999-11-5 2.1.10.2- 1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.10.2:.pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.10.3 B axis Motor Replacement

1. Remove the screw, pan M4×5 (2pcs .) and the MOTOR COVER.

2. Remove the screw, pan M4×8 (6pcs .) and the GEAR BOX B COVER.

3. Disconnect the connector from the motor (N2).

4. Loosen the coupling fixing screws (2 pcs.) on the worm shaft side.

5. Remove the bolt, socket M5×12 (4pcs.) and the motor along with the MOTOR
FLANGE.

6. Loosen the bolt, socket M5×12 (4pcs.) and then remove the coupling.

7. Remove the bolt, socket M4×8 (4pcs.) and then replace the motor.

8. Reverse steps 1 to 7.for mounting.


*Make sure that the coupling end is approximately 5mm away from the MOTOR
FLANGE.

COUPRING, 8-12

bolt, socket M4×8

MOTOR FLANGE.

bolt, socket M5×12

DC MOTOR 33W

02C72.doc
MOTOR COVER

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code
DC MOTOR 33W 632968000

1999-11-5 2.1.10.3- 1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.10.3:.pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.11 Interlock
2.1.11.1 Interlock switch replacement (standard1/3)

wiresupplyunitinterlockswitchreplacement(1/2)
1. Turn off the power and the circuit breaker.

2. Open the control box and padlock the handle of the circuit breaker.

3. Remove the connector for the interlock switch from the IO PCB CNDR2.
Refer to 3.5.5. IO PCB

4. Pull the connector out near the wire supply unit.

5. Remove the screw, pan(S/P washer) M5×8 (3pcs.).Remove the WIRE CASE COVER
50A.

wire supply unit


WIRE CASE COVER 50A
interlockswitc

02C75.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code
INTERLOCK LS ASSY, 2STD 659554001

1999-11-5 2.1.11.1- 1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.11.1.:.pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.11.1 Interlock switch replacement (standard3/3)

Side door interlock switch replacement


1. Turn of the power and the circuit breaker.

2. Open the control box door and padlock the handle of the circuit breaker.

3. Remove the connector for the interlock switch from the IO PCB CNDR1.

4. Pull the removed connector out near the side door.

5. Remove the screw, pan M4×25. Replace the INTERLOCK LS ASSY,1STD with a
new one.

6. Reverse steps from 3. To 5.

7. Check the interlock switch movement.


Refer to the Installation manual 8.8 Maintenance Operation List
47. Checking the interlock

Side door interlock switc

INTERLOCK LS ASSY,1STD

screw, pan M4×25

02C76.doc

02C01.doc

1999-11-5 2.1.11.1- 3E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.11.1.:.pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Mechanical) HS-50A

2.1.11.2 Interlock switch replacement ( EU)

1. Turn off the power and the breaker.

2. Open the control box door and padlock the handle of the circuit breaker.

3. Remove the connector for the interlock switch from the IO PCB.
CNDR1----- For side door
CNDR2-----Forfrontdoor1
CNDR3-----Forfrontdoor2

4. Pull the removed connector near the interlock switch to be replaced.

5. Remove the screw, pan 4×25(2pcs.) and replace the interlock switch with a new one.
Refer to 2.1.11.1 Interlock replacement (Standard)

6. Reverse steps from 3. to 5.

7. Check the movement of the interlock switch.


Refer to the Installation manual 8.8 Maintenance Operation List
47.Checking the interlock

INTERLOCK LS ASSY, 1EU INTERLOCK LS ASSY,3EU


For front door 1 For front door 2

INTERLOCK LS ASSY, 2EU


For side door

02C77.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be


Name Parts code
INTERLOCK LS ASSY, 1EU 659557001
INTERLOCK LS ASSY, 2EU 659553001
INTERLOCK LS ASSY,3EU 659555001

1999-11-5 2.1.11.2-1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.1.11.2.:.pm.6


Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2 Replacement procedures (Electrical)

2.2.1 Format the floppy disk by the FACIT (1/2)

Data output
1. Turn off the [POWER] switch of the machine.
2. Prepare the FACIT, and connect the communication cable to the RS-232C
connector on the right side of the operation panel.
3. Set the 3.5" floppy disk in the FACIT.
Use a 2HD floppy disk.
Set the write protect to OFF (close the notch).
4. Turn on the [POWER] switch of the FACIT.
(At this time, nothing is displayed on the LCD of the FACIT.)
5. Turn on the [POWER] switch of the machine.
The following screen appears on the FACIT.

N1060 V.??? Any data can be displayed in the ??? area.


Remote Brother
Press Stop
??????? ??:??:??

6. Format the 3.5" floppy disk by the operation on the FACIT side.
The following are the FACIT key operation:

1) Press the [STOP] key.

N1060 V.???
Any data can be displayed in the ??? area.
Ready off Line
Remote Brother
??????? ??:??:??

2) Press the [FORMAT] key.


Format Disk
2DD 2HD (1.4M)
2HD (1.2M)
Press Step/ Sel.

3) Press the [CURSOR DOWN] key twice to move the cursor to [2HD (1.2 M)].
Format Disk
2DD 2HD (1.4M)
2HD (1.2M) PG
Press Step/ Sel.

4) Press the [ENTER] key.

Insert New Disk


Press Format

1999-9-09 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.2.1:pm.6


2.2.1 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.1 Format the floppy disk by the FACIT (2/2)

5) Press the [FORMAT] key.


Formatting It takes about one minute.

•••••••

Formatting
Complete

Press Stop

6) Press the [STOP] key.


N 1 0 6 0 V.??? Any data can be displayed in the ??? area.
Ready off Line
Remote Brother
??????? ??:??:??

7) Press the [ENTER] key.

N 1 0 6 0 V.??? Any data can be displayed in the ??? area.


Remote Brother
Press Stop
??????? ??:??:??

1999-9-09 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.2.1:pm.6


2.2.1 - 2E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.2 Communication maintenance when replacing PCB (1/5)


Operation outline
1. FACIT connection.
2. Output all data from the NC to the FACIT.
3. Replace the PCB.
4. Format the memory.
5. Set the userparameter /date and time
6. Set the user parameter / communication.
7. Delete the alarm and operation logs.
8. Input all data from the FACIT to the NC.
9. Replace the FACIT.

1. Connecting the FACIT.


1. Prepare a FACIT, and connect the communication cable to the RS232C
connector on the right side of the operation panel.
2. Check that the machine power is on, and then turn the FACIT power on.
3. Check that [Brother Remote] is displayed on the FACIT LCD.
4. Insert a formatted floppy disk to the FACIT floppy drive.

2. Outputting all data from the NC to the FACIT

1. Turn power on.


2. Connect the FACIT.
3. Set the user parameter / communication.
4. Press the [EDIT] key.
5. Press the [PRGRM] key to display the <PROGRAM EDIT MENU> screen.
6. Press the [3] and [EOB/ENT] key, or move the cursor to [EXTERNAL
PROGRAM I/O] and press the [EOB/ENT] key.
7. Press the [4] and [EOB/ENT] keys, or move the cursor to [MAINTE-
NANCE] and press the [EOB/ENT] key.
8. Press the [1] and [EOB/ENT] keys, or move the cursor to [OUTPUT ALL
DATA] and press the [EOB/ENT] key.
9. Press the [E. STA] key and all data is output.
10. Upon completion of all data output, remove the floppy disk from the FACIT
and turn the FACIT power off.

1999-9-10 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.2.2.pm.6


2.2.2 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.2 Communication maintenance when replacing PCB (2/5)

Note:
Supplementary Explanation:
Up to 192 files can be output to the FACIT.
When the number of files exceeds 192, more than two floppy disks are necessary.

Operation when using two floppy disks is as follows:

1. At step 8. above, press the [3] and [EOB/ENT] keys, or move the cursor to
[OUTPUT ALL DATA BANK.] and press the [EOB/ENT] key.
2. Press the [EDIT] key and all data banks are output.
3. Upon completion of all data bank output, remove the current floppy disk
from the FACIT and insert a new one.
4. Press the [F0] key to display the computer menu.
5. Press the [2] and [EOB/ENT] keys, or move the cursor to [OUTPUT TO PC]
and press the [EOB/ENT] key.
6. Press the [1] and [EOB/ENT] keys, or move the cursor to the program items
and press the [ENT/EOB] key.
7. When the [1], [/] and [E. STA] keys are pressed on the <COMPUTER
OUTPUT MENU> screen, files are output in order from machining
program No. 1.

Note:
When more than 193 machining program files exist, files are output in two
stages.
Press the [1], [/], [1], [9], [2], and [E. STA] keys.
When the first output is completed, replace the floppy disk and press the
[1], [9], [3], [/], and [E. STA] keys.

8. Return to step 10.above.

3. Replacing PCB
1. Replace the PCB.

1999-9-10 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.2.2.pm.6


2.2.2 - 2E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.2 Communication maintenance when replacing PCB (3/5)

4. Formattingmemory
1. Set the [PROTECT] switch to [OFF].
2. Press the [EDIT] key.
3. Press the [I/O] key to display the <INPUT/OUTPUT MENU> screen. Select
[1. INPUT/OUTPUT].
4. Press the [PAGE DOWN] or [PAGE UP] key to display the version screen.
5. Move the cursor to [PARAMETER CHANGE].
6. Press the [1] and [EOB/ENT] key.
7. Press the [PRGRM] key to display the <PROGRAM EDIT MENU> screen.
8. Press the [2] and [EOB/ENT] keys, or move the cursor to [DIRECTORY OF
MEMORY] and press the [EOB/ENT] key.
9. Press the [F4] key.
10. When instructed on the screen, press the [DEL] key.
11. Press the [F0] key on the memory format check screen.

Note:
When [PARAMETER CHANGE] is set to [1:YES], attempting to press the [RST]
key or changing mode changes the setting to [0:NO].

5. Setting user parameter / date and time


1. Press the [DATA BANK] key to display the <DATA BANK MENU> screen.
2. Press the [4] and [EOB/ENT] keys , or move the cursor to the desired user
parameter and press the [EOB/ENT] key.
3. Press the [1] and [EOB/ENT] keys, or move the cursor to switch 1 and press
the [EOB/ENT] key.
4. Press the [PAGE DOWN] key several times to move the cursor to [CURRENT
DATE] and [CURRENT TIME] and correct them if necessary.
5. Press the [F0] key twice.

1999-9-10 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.2.2.pm.6


2.2.2 - 3E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.2 Communication maintenance when replacing PCB (4/5)

6. Setting user parameter / communication


1. Press the [DATA BANK] key to display the <DATA BANK MENU> screen.
2. Press the [4] and [EOB/ENT] keys, or move the cursor to the desired user
parameter and press the [EOB/ENT] key.
3. Press the [1] and [EOB/ENT] keys, or move the cursor to
[COMMUNICATION] and press the [EOB/ENT] key.
4. Set the following values:
[SELECT PORT] 0 (port A)
[CONNECTION OBJECT] 1(computer)
[COMP COMMUNICATN PROTOCOL]
0 (format 1)
[BAUD RATE] 5(9600)
[PARITY] 0 (none)
[STOP BIT] 0 (1 bit)
[CHARACTER] 0 (7 bit)
[RESPONSE MONITORING TIME] 60
[COMMUNICATION TYPE] 0(line)
[DR SIGNAL CHECK] 1(YES)
[TRANS DATA CODE] 0 (ISO)
[END OF BLOCK] 0 (CR, LF)
[RECOVERY TIME] 1

7. Deleting alarm and operation time logs.

1. Display the screen to delete the alarm and operation time logs.
(Refer to Chapter 1, the hidden operation section.)
2. Move the cursor to [DELETE ALARM LOG], and press the [1] and
[EOB/ENT] keys.
3. Move the cursor to [DELETE OPERATION LOG], and press the [1] and
[EOB/ENT] keys.

1999-9-10 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.2.2.pm.6


2.2.2 - 4E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.2 Communication maintenance when replacing PCB (5/5)

8. Inputting all data from the FACIT to the NC.


1. Set the [PROTECT] switch to [OFF].
2. Set the user parameter / communication.
3. Press the [EDIT] key.
4. Press the [I/O] key to display the <INPUT/OUTPUT MENU> screen. Select
[1. INPUT/OUTPUT].
5. Press the [PAGE DOWN] or [PAGE UP] key to display the version screen.
6. Move the cursor to [PARAMETER CHANGE].
7. Press the [1] and [EOB/ENT] keys.
8. Press the [PRGRM] key to display the <PROGRAM EDIT MENU> screen.
9. Press the [3] and [EOB/ENT] keys , or move the cursor to [EXTERNAL
PROGRAM I/O] and press the [EOB/ENT] key.
10. Press the [4] and [EOB/ENT] keys, or move the cursor to [MAINTENANCE]
and press the [EOB/ENT] key.
11. Press the [2] and [EOB/ENT] keys, or move the cursor to [INPUT ALL DATA]
and press the [EOB/ENT] key.
12. Press the [EDIT] key and all data is input.
(The [SAME DATA BANK EXISTS. MACHINE DATA INPUT OK?] message
appears. Press the [F3] key [INPUT HERE-AFTER]).
13. Upon completion of all data input, remove the floppy disk from the FACIT and
turn the FACIT power off.
14. Turn the machine power off.

Notes:
1)When [PARAMETER CHANGE] is set to [1:YES], attempting to press the [RST]
key or changing mode changes the setting to [0:NO].
2)When using more than two floppy disks to output all data from the TC to the
FACIT, replace the floppy disk when step 12. above is completed, and press
the [E.STA] key.

9. Disconnecting the FACIT


1. Remove the floppy disk from the FACIT.
2. Turn the FACIT power off.
3. Disconnect the communication cable from the operation panel.

1999-9-10 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.2.2.pm.6


2.2.2 - 5E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.3 NC PCB replacement (1/2)

1. Send all data to the FACIT. (All data is stored in the NC PCB.)
(Refer to 2.2.2 Communication maintenance when replacing PCB. )
2. Turn off the [POWER] switch and then the main power breaker.
3. Disconnect all NC PCB and WSLV PCB connectors.
4. Loosen the screws at four corners of the NC PCB shassis, and remove the
PCB with the shassis mounted.
5. Remove the WSLV PCB, MEM PCB, GRAM module from the NC PCB.
Note: Take the utmost care to prevent your hands or conductive objects
from contacting the PCB connector pins and pattern areas.
6. Replace the NC PCB.
7. Check the NC PCB dip switch settings. The settings should be the same as
those before replacement
8. Mount the NC PCB to the control box in the reverse order of steps 3 to 5.
Note: Firmly set the PCB so as not to allow any clearance. If unavoidable,
slightly move the support as far as the hole allows.
9. Set the [PROTECT] switch to [OFF].
10. Press the [EMERGENCY STOP] switch, and turn on the main power breaker
and then the [POWER] switch.
11. Send all data from the FACIT.
(Refer to 2.2.2 Communication maintenance when replacing PCB. )
12. Turn off the [POWER] switch.
13. Press the [EMERGENCY STOP] switch, and turn on the [POWER] switch.
Check the key operation, display, and alarm indication.
14. Reset the [EMERGENCY STOP] switch and check operation.

1999-9-10 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.2.3.pm.6


2.2.3 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.3 NC PCB replacement (2/2)

MEM PCB

WSLVPCB
GRAM module

NCPCB

DIP SW

NC PCB chassis

DIP SW

1 to 4 : Main
5 to 8 : Local

Bit Content Setting


OFF 1
1 ON
2 ON 2

3 ON 3

4 ON 4
5 * 5
BIT 6 BIT 5
6
ON ON Japanese
7
ON OFF English
6 *
OFF ON German 8

OFF OFF French

7 ON

8 ON

(Note)
Not change the SW without 5 or 6 bit.

Replacement parts Tools to be used


Name Parts code
Phillips screw driver
NC PCB ASSY A10 659652- *** Phillips screw driver(small)

1999-9-10 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.2.3.pm.6


2.2.3 - 2E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.4 MEM PCB replacement

1. Send the program data to the FACIT in the case that the data may be damaged
during replacement.
(Refer to 2.2.2 Communication maintenance when replacing PCB. )
2. Turn off the [POWER] switch and then the main power breaker.
3. Loosen the screws securing the MEM PCB stay to the NC PCB chassis, and
remove the MEM PCB.
4. Mount a new MEM PCB.
(Check that the PCB version is appropriate for the machine specifications.)
5. Mount the MEM PCB stay to the NC PCB chassis.
6. Press the [EMERGENCY STOP] switch, and turn on the main power breaker and
then the [POWER] switch.
7. Check the key operation, display, and alarm indication.
If the program data is damaged, send the data from the FACIT.
(Refer to 2.2.2 Communication maintenance when replacing PCB. )
8. Reset the [EMERGENCY STOP] switch and check operation.

MEM PCB

WSLVPCB
GRAM module

NCPCB

NC PCB chassis

Replacement parts Tools to be used


Name Parts code
Phillips screw driver
MEM UNIT ASSY A10 659757 - ***

1999-9-10 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual.2.2.4.pm.6


2.2.4 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.5 WSLV PCB replacement

* Perform back-up of all data as it may be lost or altered during replacement.


1. Turn off the [POWER] switch and then the main power breaker.
2. Remove all connectors from the WSLV PCB.
3. Remove all screws securing the WSLV PCB stay.
Note: Be careful not to lose the screws.
4. Replace the WSLV PCB.
Check that the dip switch (SW1) setting is correct.
Check that the jumper socket is not connected to JP19.
Check that the connectors joining the NC PCB and the WSLV PCB
are fully interlocked.
5. Mount a new WSLV PCB in the reverse order of steps 2 and 3.
6. Push the [Emergency stop] switch, turn on the main power breaker and then
the [POWER] switch.
7. Check the key operation, display indication, and alarms.
8. Release the [Emergency stop] button, and check operation.

SW1 setting table


Function Default
1 For the software development ON
2 Not used. ON
3 For the software development ON
4 For the software development ON
5-8 Not used. ON

WSLVPCB
WSLVPCB

NCPCB

JP 19

SW 1
SW 1
ON

OFF
1 8

Replacement parts Tools to be used


Name Parts code
Phillips screw driver
WSLV PCB ASSY A10 659698 - *** Phillips screw driver (small)

1999-9-10 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.2.5:pm.6


2.2.5 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.6 Wire ROM replacement

* Perform back-up of all data as it may be lost or altered during replacement.


1. Turn off the [POWER] switch and then the main power breaker.
2. Remove all connectors from the WSLV PCB.
3. Remove all screws securing the WSLV PCB stay.
Note: Be careful not to lose the screws.
4. Remove the wire ROM from the WSLV PCB.
5. Make sure the ROM is most recent version, and then adjust the leads of the
ROM in accordance with the IC socket width.
6. Install the ROM in the IC socket.
Note: Make sure the ROM is installed in the correct direction.
7. Mount the WSLV PCB.
8. Push the [Emergency stop] switch, turn on the main power breaker and then
the [POWER] switch.
9. Check the key operation, display indication, and alarms.
10. Release the [Emergency stop] button, and check operation.

WSLVPCB
WSLVPCB

NCPCB

Wire ROM

Replacement parts Tools to be used


Name Parts code
Phillips screw driver
ROM SOFT ASSY WA10 659700 - *** Phillips screw driver (small)

1999-9-10 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.2.6:pm.6


2.2.6 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.7 GRAM module replacement

* Perform back-up of all data as it may be lost or altered during replacement.


1. Turn off the [POWER] switch and then the main power breaker.
2. Open the ejector of the socket (CNDIMM1) on the NC PCB.
3. Replace the GRAM module.
4. Close the ejector of the socket (CNDIMM1) on the NC PCB.
5. Turn on the main power breaker and then the [POWER] switch.
6. Check the graphic screen display.

MEM PCB

WSLVPCB
GRAMmodule

NCPCB

GRAMmodule

Ejector

Socket
(CNDIMM1)

Replacement parts Tools to be used


Name Parts code

GRAM MODULE ASSY A10 659654 - ***

1999-9-10 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.2.7:pm.6


2.2.7 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.8 IO PCB replacement

1. Turn off the [POWER] switch and the main power breaker.
2. After taking notes of the terminal block XTIO No. and the cord mark tube No.
disconnect the cords.
3. Remove all the connectors and codes.
4. Remove nine fixing screws from the IO PCB and replace it.
Note:Take care that any parts on the solder side of PCB don't hit stud boss
while replacing the PCB.
5. Connect the connectors.
6. Connect cords to the terminal block.
7. Turn the main power breaker and the [POWER] switch on .
8. Check motion.

Control box IOPCB

XTIO

IOPCB

Procedure to connect
the terminal box.

02201.doc

02202.ai

Replacement parts Tools to be used


Name Parts code
Phillips screw driver
IO PCB ASSY A10 659616 - *** Screw driver (small)

1999-12-29 MO89: Maintenance manual 2.2.8:pm.6


2.2.8 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.9 WD PCB replacement

1. Turn off the [POWER] switch and the main power breaker.
2. Disconnect all the connectors from the WD PCB.
3. Remove nine fixing screws from the WD PCB and replace it.
4. Connect the connectors.
5. Turn the main power breaker while pushing breaker handle bracket and the
[POWER] switch on .
6. Adjust the wire tension.
Refer to ***Wire tension adjustment.

Control box WDPCB


Main tension
adjustment

WDPCB VR2
+ - Pretension
adjustment

VR1
+ -

CNOP

CNWD

02201.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be used


Name Parts code
Phillips screw driver
WD PCB ASSY A10 659671 - *** Screw driver (small)

1999-9-10 MO89: HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.2.9:pm.6


2.2.9 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.10 Servo driver replacement

1. Turn off the [POWER] switch and the main power breaker.
2. Disconnect all the connectors.
3. Remove two fixing screws from the Servo driver and replace it.
Note: Each servo driver is to be careful not to mistake it to remove because a
shape is the same.
4. Connect the connectors.
5. Turn on the main power breaker while pushing breaker handle bracket and the
[POWER] switch .
6. Adjust the deviation.
Refer to 2.4.1 Deviation adjustment.

ControlBox XY servo driver


UV servo driver
Z servo driver
B servo driver

02201.doc XY servo driver


UV servo driver
Z servo driver
B servo driver

Replacement parts Tools to be used


Name Parts code
Phillips screw driver
XY SERVO DRIVER ASSY 659726-*** Screw driver (small)
UV SERVO DRIVER ASSY 659727-***
Z SERVO DRIVER ASSY 659728-***
B SERVO DRIVER ASSY 659729-***

1999-9-10 MO89: HS-50A Maintenance manual 2.2.10:pm.6


2.2.10-1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.11 DC PCB replacement

1. Turn off the [POWER] switch and the main power breaker.
2. Disconnect all the connectors from DC PCB.
3. Remove four fixing screws from the DC PCB and replace it.
4. Connect the connectors.
5. Turn on the main power breaker and the [POWER] switch .
6. Do electric discharging, and confirm that there is no wrong point.

ControlBox

DCPCB

02201.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be used


Name Parts code
Phillips screw driver (short)
DC PCB ASSY A10 659704 - ***

1999-10-14 MO89: Maintenance manual 2.2.11:pm.6


2.2.11-1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.12 PMU replacement

1. Open the control door, and turn on the main power breaker while pushing
breaker handle bracket.
2. The [POWER] switch on.
3. Identify the faulty PMU using the LED on the PMD unit.
Note:Replace the faulty PMU corresponding to the LED lit.
4. Turn off the [POWER] switch and the main power breaker .
5. Remove all connectors and harness terminals from the PMU to be replaced.
6. Install the new PMU and connect the connectors and harness terminals.
Note:Make sure the harness terminals are correctly connected.
7. Turn on the main power breaker and the [POWER] switch.
8. Do electoric discharging, and confirm that there is no wrong point.

PMU1
ControlBox PMU2
PMU3

PMD unit

PMU breakage LED1

PMU breakage LED2

PMU breakage LED3

02201.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be used


Name Parts code
Phillips screw driver
PMU ASSY 633724 - ***

1999-10-14 MO89: Maintenance manual 2.2.12:pm.6


2.2.12-1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.13 Unit of discharge replacement

1. Turn off the [POWER] switch and main power breaker.


2. Remove all connectors and harness terminals from the unit to be replaced.
3. Install the new unit and connect the connectors and harness terminals.
Note:Make sure the harness terminals are correctly connected.
4. Turn on the main power breaker and the [POWER] switch.
5. Do electoric discharging, and confirm that there is no wrong point.
6. In case of Clamp PCB unit replacement, check the clamp voltage.
Refer to 2.4.4 Discharge clamp power voltage check.
.

ControlBox

SUD unit

PMD unit

Clamp PCB unit

02201.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be used


Name Parts code
Mluti-meter
PCB UNIT SUD 633728 - ***
PCB UNIT PMD 633730 - *** Phillips screw driver
PCB UNIT CLAMP 633589 - ***

1999-10-14 MO89: Maintenance manual 2.2.13:pm.6


2.2.13-1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.14 AVR replacement

1. Turn off the [POWER] switch and main power breaker.


2. Remove all connectors and harness terminals from the AVR to be replaced.
3. Install the new AVR and connect the connectors and harness terminals.
4. Turn on the main power breaker while pushing breaker handle bracket, and the
[POWER] switch.
5. Check output voltage of AVR.
Note:As it's only adjustable AVR1, adjust AVR1 in case of over the voltage
range.

AVR OUTPUT POINT RANGE


PLACE + -
AVR1 +5V NC PCB 5V(CH17) (GND)CH15 4.85-5.15V
+15V TB1 P15 AG 14.25-15.75V
-15V TB1 AG N15 14.25-15.75V
AVR2 +5V TB1 P5B 0V 4.85-5.15V
AVR3 +5V KEY PCB +5V 0V 4.85-5.15V
+12V KEY PCB +12V 0V 11.6-12.4V
AVR4 +24V IO PCB DC24 P0B2 22.8-25.2V
AVR5 +24V AVR5 P24C P0C 22.8-25.2V
E2.2.14.xls
ControlBox

AVR5 Operation Panel


AVR2

AVR1 AVR3

AVR4
03201.doc

02201.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be used


Name Parts code
Mluti-meter
AVR1:AVR LCD60F-2-Y 659754-001
AVR2:AVR LDA10F-5 659755-001 Phillips screw driver
AVR3:AVR LDC30F-1 638140-001
AVR4:AVR LDA100W-24 659756-001
AVR5:AVR LDA300W24T 659762-001

1999-10-14 MO89: Maintenance manual 2.2.14:pm.6


2.2.14-1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.16 Keyboard replacement

1. Turn off the [POWER] switch and then the main power breaker.
2. Remove screws from the front operation panel , open the panel and remove rear
panel.
3. Remove AVR3 connector.
4. Remove all keyboard connectors.
5. Remove the screws securing AVR3 stay. Remove AVR3 stay with AVR3
mounted.
6. Remove the nuts securing the keyboard.
7. Replace the keyboard.
8. Mount a new keyboard in the reverse order of steps 3 to 6.
9. Close the panel and tighten the screws.
10. Press the [EMERGENCY STOP] switch, and turn on the main power breaker and
then the [POWER] switch.
11. Check the key operation.

The keyboard consists of the Key PCB and the key seat. Be sure to replace both
together.

Operation panel rear

AVR3
Keyboard

03201.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be used


Name Parts code
Phillips screw driver
Japan Keyboard assy J 654715-001
M3 Nut driver
Others Keyboard assy E 654715-101

1999-10-15 MO89: Maintenance manual 2.2.16:pm.6


2.2.16-1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.17 LCD replacement

1. Turn off the [POWER] switch and then the main power breaker.
2. Remove screws from the front operation panel , open the panel and remove rear
panel.
3. Remove the screws (M3, 2 pcs.) securing the LCD inverter stay and detach the
connector for the LCD inverter.
4. Remove the CNLCDRV connector from the keyboard, and remove bands con-
necting the CNLCDRV cord.
5. Remove four spacers securing the LCD.
6. Replace the LCD with the CNLCDRV cord connected.
7. Secure the LCD in the reverse order of steps 2 to 4. At this time, secure the
ferrite cord of the CNLCDRV cord with cable ties.
8. Turn on the main power breaker and then the [POWER] switch. Check that the
LCD turns on.

Note: Since the connector for the LCD and that for the cord CNLCDRV are very
small, replace the LCD without disconnecting the cord CNLCDRV.

Operation panel

LCD inverter stay LCD

LCD inverter

CNBKLT cord Ferrite


Ferrite CNLCDRVcord
Keyboard

03201.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be used


Name Parts code
Phillips screw driver
LCD assy 654496-001

1999-10-15 MO89: Maintenance manual 2.2.17:pm.6


2.2.17-1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.18 LCD inverter replacement

1. Turn on the [POWER] switch and then the main power breaker.
2. Remove screws from the front operation panel , open the panel and remove rear
panel.
3. Remove two M3 screws securing the LCD inverter stay, and disconnect the
connector between the LCD inverter and the LCD.
4. Remove two M2 screws securing the LCD inverter.
5. Remove the CNBKLT connector from the keyboard, and remove cable ties
securing the CNBKLT cord.
6. Replace the LCD inverter with the CNBKLT cord connected.
7. Secure the LCD inverter in the reverse order of steps 2 to 4. At this time, secure
the ferrite cord of the CNBKLT cord with cable ties.
Paint the agent for preventing screw loosening leaks and rust before mounting
M2 screws which were removed in step4.
9. Turn on the main power breaker and then the [POWER] switch. Check that the
LCD turns on and displays the data correctly.

Note: Since the connector for the LCD inverter and that for the cord CNBKLT are
very small, replace the LCD inverter without disconnecting the cord CNBKLT.

Operation panel

LCD inverter stay LCD

LCD inverter

CNBKLT cord Ferrite


Ferrite CNLCDRVcord
Keyboard

03201.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be used


Name Parts code
Phillips screw driver
LCD inverter assy 654497-001

1999-10-18 MO89: Maintenance manual 2.2.18:pm.6


2.2.18-1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.2.19 Pump inverter replacement

1. Turn off the [POWER] switch and then the main power breaker.
2. Check that the inverter Charge LED is unlit. (Note that the voltage is charged to
the internal condenser for 30 seconds or so even after power supply is cut.)
3. Open the inverter front cover.
4. Remove connector CNINV from the inverter control cable.
5. Remove the power cable, motor cable, and grounding cable from the inverter
terminalblock.
6. Remove fixing screws from the inverter and replace it.
7. Fully turn the knob on the inverter front panel counterclockwise.
8. Reverse order of steps 3 to 5.
9. Turn on the main power breaker and the [POWER] switch .
10. Press the [WATER] key in, and check that the main pump runs smoothly.

TerminalBox

Charge LED

Knob

Inverter

03202.doc

Replacement parts Tools to be used


Name Parts code

Inverter assy 2.2KW 659862-001 Phillips screw driver

1999-10-18 MO89: Maintenance manual 2.2.19:pm.6


2.2.19-1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3 Adjustment procedures (Machine)


2.3.1 Feed Axis
2.3.1.1 X,Y axes Over run LS adjustment(1/2)

1. Remove the cover.


Refer to 2.1.1.1 X, Y axes cover removal.

2. Bring the dog on the adjustment side of a dog near the LIMIT SWITCH, D2MV by
jog operation and stop it.

3. Turn off the power and the breaker.

4. Loosen the screw, pan (s/p washer) M5×8(2pcs.) securing the dog to be adjusted.

screws, pan (s/p washer) M5×8


X axis
dog

02C89.doc

screws, pan (s/p washer) M5×8


Yaxis
dog

02C90.doc

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.3.1.1:pm6
2.3.1.1 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.1.1 X,Y axes Over run LS adjustment(2/2)

5. Rotate the ball screw to the adjustment side until the stopper hits.
( Insert a tool into the bolt,socket(M5) at the head of the ball screw and rotate it.)

6. Return the ball screw between 1.5 and 2.0 mm from the stopped position in step 5.
(Return the ball screw between 3/4 and 1 turn.)

7. Set the dog to the position where the dog can set the LIMIT SWITCH, D2MV to ON,
while keeping the condition in step6.Secure the screw, pan (S/P washer) 5×8DB(2 pcs.)
to fix the dog.
* ON/ OFF can be checked on the <I/O> screen.
Press the [I/O] key. Move the cursor to the <1.INPUT/OUTPUT>
Press the [ENTER].
Refer to 5.5 Description of the <IO> screen
+X side: When main 1 input 9 bit 0 indicate "0", it is set to OFF.
When main 1 input 9 bit 0 indicate "1", it is set to ON.
- X side: When main 1 input 9 bit 1 indicate "0", it is set to OFF.
When main 1 input 9 bit 1 indicate "1", it is set to ON.
+Y side: When main 1 input 9 bit 2 indicate"0", it is set to OFF.
When main 1 input 9 bit 2 indicate "1", it is set to ON.
-Y side: When main 1 input 9 bit 3 indicate "0", it is set to OFF.
When main 1 input 9 bit 3 indicate "1", it is set to ON.

8. Set the grid shift value.


Refer to 2.1.1.6 XY axes Grid shift value setting.

Stopper

Ball screw

02C91.doc
Bolt,socket(M5)

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.3.1.1:pm6
2.3.1.1 - 2E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.1.2 Z axes Over run LS adjustment(1/3)

1. Remove the COVER SU50A.


Refer to the Replacement and disassembly

2. Loosen screw, pan (S/P washer) M5×8 (2pcs.) and detach the dog from the
LIMIT SWITCH D2MV.

3. Replace the UPPER NOZZLE 1506 with a new one.

4. Fix the height pre setter on the work base.

5. Move the Z axis until the height pre setter indicates the set-up height.

screw, pan (S/P washer) M5×8

dog

02C95.doc

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.3.1.2:pm6
2.3.1.2-1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.1.2 Z axes Over run LS adjustment(3/3)

9. Set the dog to the position where the dog can set the limit switch D2MV to ON,
while keeping the condition in step 8.
Secure the screw, pan (S/P washer) 5×8DB(2 pcs.) to fix the dog.
* ON/ OFF can be checked on the <I/O> screen.
Press the [I/O] key. Move the cursor to the <1.INPUT/OUTPUT>.
Press the [ENTER].
+Z side: When main 1 input 9 bit 4 indicate "0", it is set to OFF.
When main 1 input 9 bit 4 indicate "1", it is set to ON.
- Z side: When main 1 input 9 bit 5 indicate "0", it is set to OFF.
When main 1 input 9 bit 5 indicate "1", it is set to ON.

10. Set the origin offset value and grid shift value.
Refer to 2.3.1.4 Z axis origin offset value setting
2.3.1.7 Z axis grid shift value setting.

11. Replace the upper nozle with a new one.

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.3.1.2:pm6
2.3.1.2-3E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.1.3 U,V axes Over run LS adjustment(1/3)

1. Move the machining tank next to the column by the jog operation , and stop it.
Turn off the power and the breaker.

2. Remove the collection device box. (Automatic wire threading device use only)

3. U axis: Remove the COVER .


V axis : Remove the Z UNDER COVER.
Refer to 2.1.2 Z.U.V axes cover removal

4. Bring the dog for the adjustment side of the dog near the limit switch, D2MV by
the jog operation. And stop it.

5. Turn off the power and the breaker.

6. Loosen screws, pan (s/p washer) M5×8(2pcs.) securing the dog to be adjusted.

dog

U axis
screws, pan (s/p washer) M5×8

02C09.doc

dog

screws, pan (s/p washer) M5×8

V axis
quil

02c10.doc

1999-12-14 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.3.1.3:pm6
2.3.1.3-1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.1.3 U,V axes Over run LS adjustment(2/3)

7. Move the axis to the mechanical stopper on the adjustment side.


*Move the quil to the movement direction manually.

8. Rotate the coupling and return the axis between 1.5mm and 2.0mm from the position
where the ball screw had been stopped in step 7.
(Return the ball screw between 3/4 and 1 turn.)
Refer to 2.1.3.6 UV axes motor replacement

9. Set the dog to the position where the dog can set the LIMIT SWITCH D2MV to ON,
while keeping the condition in step 8.Secure the screw, pan (S/P washer) 5×8DB(2 pcs.)
to fix the dog.
* ON/ OFF can be checked on the <I/O> screen.
Press the [I/O] key. Move the cursor to the <1.INPUT OUTPUT>.
Press the [ENTER].
+Xside: When main 1 input 9 bit 0 indicate"0", it is set to OFF.
When main 1 input 9 bit 0 indicate"1", it is set to ON.
-Xside: When main 1 input 9 bit 1 indicate"0", it is set to OFF.
When main 1 input 9 bit 1 indicate"1", it is set to ON.
+Yside: When main 1 input 9 bit 2 indicate"0", it is set to OFF.
When main 1 input 9 bit 2 indicate"1", it is set to ON.
-Yside: When main 1 input 9 bit 3 indicate"0", it is set to OFF.
When main 1 input 9 bit 3 indicate"1", it is set to ON.

Refer to 5.5 Description of the <I/O> screen.

stoppar

02C18.doc
BALLSCREW,L160

1999-12-14 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.3.1.3:pm6
2.3.1.3-2E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.1.3 U,V axes Over run LS adjustment(3/3)

10. Set the origin offset value and grid shift value.
Refer to 2.3.1.5 UV axes origin offset value setting

11. Operate the vertical alignment.


Refer to Operation Manual Chapter 6 6.2.5 Vertical Alignment
* Check following items when the vertical alignment can not be operated.
Display the <I/O> screen.
Press the [I/O] key Move the cursor to <1.INPUT/OUTPUT>
Press the [ENTER] key several times to display the <DIAG> screen.
When the vertical offset value for the UV axes is not within 32.5 to 36.9,
adjust the dog on the zero point side. Then, operate steps from 11.

12. Move UV axes in jog operation.


Check if both UV axes can move more than 32.5 to + and - direction.

13. When the axis can not be moved, repeat from 5. to 13.

1999-12-14 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.3.1.3:pm6
2.3.1.3-3E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.1.4 Z axis origin offset value setting

1. Set the Z axis offset pulse data to "0".


Refer to 2.3.1.8 Origin offset value

2. Turn the power off and on.

3. Operate the zero point return.

4. Select <I/O mode> - <1.INPUT/OUTPUT> - <OFFSET PULSE>.


Take a note of the Z axis offset pulse data.
Press [I/O] and [CURSOR DOWN] to move the cursor to the <1.INPUT/OUTPUT>
Press [ENT] and [PAGE DOWN] five times.

5. Input the origin offset value from the Z axis offset pulse data.
Refer to 2.3.1.8 origin offset inputting.

When the offset value is between 0 and 2000, or between 6000 and 8000,
→input "4000" for the origin offset value.
When the offset value is between 2001 and 5999,
→Input "0" for the origin offset value..

6. Turn the power off and on to finish the procedure.

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.3.1.4:pm6
2.3.1.4 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.1.5 U,V axes origin offset, grid shifut value setting

1. Set the U,V axes offset pulse data [0].


Refer to 2.3.1.8 Origin offset value setting
2.3.1.9 Grid shift value setting

2. Turn the power off and on.

3. Operate the zero point return.

4. Select <I/O mode> - <INPUT/OUTPUT> - <OFFSET PULSE>.


Take a note of U,V axes offset pulse data.
Press [I/O] and [CURSOR DOWN] to move the cursor to the <1.INPUT/OUTPUT>.
Press [ENT] and [PAGE DOWN] five times.

5. Calculate the origin offset value and the grid shift value, using the value taken note of in
step.4 and value in the table indicated below.
Input the origin offset, grid shift value from the U,Vaxis offset pulse data.
Refer to 2.3.1.8 Origin offset value setting
2.3.1.9 Grid shift value setting
Ex.)
When the offset pulse for U axis is 6200, input the value acquired, using the formula
below.
U axis origin offset value " 4000"
U axis gurid shifut value "-4001"

6. Turn the power off and on.

7. Operate the zero point return.

Offset pulse Origin offset value Grid shift value


0- 800 4000 -6000
801-1600 4000 -6801
1601-2000 4000 -7601
2001-2400 0 - 1
2401-3200 0 - 401
3201-4000 0 -1201
4001-4800 0 -2001
4801-5600 0 -2801
5601-6000 0 -3601
6001-6400 4000 -4001
6401-7200 4000 -4401
7201-8000 4000 -5201

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.3.1.5:pm6
2.3.1.5-1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.1.6 X,Y axes Grid shift value setting (2/3)

6. Move the machining tank to the position the jig can be fixed.
Mount the jigu on the work base.
Refer to (1/3)
*Refer to (3/3) for the jigu reference drawing.

7. Operate the end face alignment. Take note of the measurement position (lower line.)
Press the [MDI] key to select the <4. END FACE ALIGNMENT>.
1) Input the Measurement Position (upper line)
Input "20." for X and Y axes.
2) Input the measurement direction
Input <2:-X> to measure the X axis
Input <4:-Y> to measure the Y axis.
3)Press the [F4](TEACH POSI. LOAD) key. Press the [START] key.
*When completing the procedure for one axis, start the measurement after isolating
the wire from the jigu.
( The end face alignment can not be started while the wire touches the jigu.)
Refer to Operation Manual Chapter 6 MDI operation 6.2.2.4 Face end Alignment

8. Calculate the grid shift value from the measurement value in step 7.
Calculation;
X axis : {X axis machine coordinate -(the wire diameter/2)-15}×2000
= X axis grid shift value.
Y axis : {Y axis machine coordinate -(the wire diameter/2)-15}×2000
= Y axis grid shift value.

9. Input the calculated value.


Refer to 2.3.1.9 Grid shift value setting

10. Turn the power switch on and off.

11. When the stroke for each axes moves, the X,Y grid shift value setting can be com-
pleted.
When "OVER TRAVEL" generates during the operation, adjust the limit switch.
Refer to 2.3.1.1. XY axes Over run LS adjustment

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.3.1.6:pm6
2.3.1.6 - 2E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.1.6 X,Y axes Grid shift value setting (3/3)

jigu reference drawing

77±0.01
50
105

10

20

30

27±0.01 20 2-Ø9
62

117

recessing
optionalform
10
+0.014
Ø 8 +0.005

8
18 (32)
27

02C94.doc

Ø6

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.3.1.6:pm6
2.3.1.6 - 3E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.1.7 Z axis Grid shift value setting (1/3)

1. Replace the upper nozzle with a new one.

2. Set the Z axis grid shift value to "0".


Refer to 2.3.1.9 Grid shift value setting.

3. When inch is used for the machine unit, switch to metric.


Press the [DATA BANK] to select the <USER PARAMETER> in the <SWITCH 1>
Press the [PAGE DOWN] 8 times to select the <MACHINE UNIT SYSTEM>.
Input "0" and press [F0] two times.

4. Operate the zero point return.

5. Set the high pre setter as indicated below.

6. Lower the Z axis until the height pre setter indicates the set-up height.

7. Splay the <POS> screen and take a note of the Z axis value at the <MACHINE POS>.

UPPERNOZZLE1506
(632902001)

height pre setter red light

work base

02c96.doc

Tools to be
UPPERNOZZLE1506

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.3.1.7:pm6
2.3.1.7-1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.1.7 Z axis Grid shift value setting (2/3)

8. Calculate the gird shift value.


Z axis grid shift value
= (the Z axis value taken note of in step7.- height pre setter set up height) × 4000

Ex.)
When the Z axis coordinate is 149.061 and the height pre setter is 100.
Z axis grid shift value
= (99.061-100) ×4000
= -3756
9. Input the calculated value as it is. The calculated value can be both - and +.
Refer to 2.3.1.9 grid shift value setting.

10. Turn the power off and on.


When the alarm “OVER TRAVEL” generates while operating the zero point
return, adjust the limit switch. Then, restart the Z axis grid shift value setting from
the step 1.
Refer to 2.3.1.2 Z axis over run limit switch Adjustment.

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.3.1.7:pm6
2.3.1.7-2E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.1.7 Z axis Grid shift value setting (3/3)

11. Operate the step 6. Then, check that the Z axis value for the < MACHINE POS>
on the <POS> screen indicates 150.
If the Z axis coordinate is not 150, repeat steps from 2.to 11.

12. Check the Z axis stroke by MDI operation.


Press [MDI] to execute the program below.
G53G91G0Z5. [START]

13. When the stroke moves, setting procedure is completed.


Adjust the limit switch when the alarm “OVER TRAVEL” generates, while
operating the program.
Refer 2.3.1.2 Z axis over run LS adjustment

14. Replace the UPPER NOZZLE 1506 with a new one.

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.3.1.7:pm6
2.3.1.7-3E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.1.8 Origin offset value inputting

1. Press the [I/O] key. Move the cursor to <1.INPUT/ OUTPUT>.


Press the [ENTER] key.

2. Press the [PAGE UP] key one time to select the <PARAMETER CHANGE> to input "1".
(Parameter change is possible.)

3. Press the [DATA BANK] key.


Move the cursor to the <MACHINE PARAMETER>. Press the [ENT] key.

Z axis: Move the cursor to select <1. SYSTEM 1>. Press the [ENT] key and
the [PAGE DOWN] key 8 times to display the <Z ORIGIN OFFSET
VALUE>.
UV axes: Move the cursor to select <1. SYSTEM 3>. Press the [ENT] key and
the [PAGE DOWN] key 4 times to display the <U ORIGIN OFFSET
VALUE> and the <V ORIGIN OFFSET VALUE>.

4. Move the cursor to change the origin offset value and input the value.
Press the [ENT] key. Press the [F0] key two times.

5. Turn the power off and on.

1999-11-5 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.3.1.8:pm6
2.3.1.8 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.1.9 Grid shift value inputting

1. Press the [I/O] key. Move the cursor to <1.INPUT/ OUTPUT>.


Press the [ENTER] key.

2. Press the [PAGE UP] key one time to select the <PARAMETER CHANGE> to input "1".
(Parameter change is possible.)

3. Move the cursor to the < MACHINE PARAMETER> and press the [ENT] key.

Z axis: Move the cursor to select <1.SYSTEM 1>. Press the [ENT] key and
the [PAGE DOWN] key 3 times to display the <GRID SHIFT VALUE Z> .
U,Vaxis: Move the cursor to select <3.SYSTEM 3>. Press the [ENT] key and
the [PAGE DOWN] key one time to display the <GRID SHIFT
VALUE U > and <GRID SHIFT VALUE V>

4. Move the cursor to change the origin offset value.


Press the [ENT] key. Press the [F0] key two times.

5. Turn the power off and on.

1999-11-05 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.3.1.9:pm6
2.3.1.9 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.2. Wire
2.3.2.1 Wire tension Adjustment (1/7)

Prepare a wire electrode of the following size:Diameter: φ 0.25 or φ 0.3


Reeled wire diameter: φ 100 mm or more.
Install the upper wire guide appropriate for the wire electrode prepared.
Refer to the Installation manual. 8-8 Maintenance Operation List
Upper wire guide / upper nozzle replacement

Pretension adjustment(1/3)
1. Measure the diameter of the reeled wire electrode. Refer to the attached graph
(reeled wire diameter - pretension) and determine the pretension value correspond-
ing to the diameter of the reeled wire to be used.
Refer to 2.3.2.1 Wire tension adjustment (7/7)

2. Perform the powder brake warm-up operation.


To start the warm-up operation enter "0" to <WIRE SPEED> and then press the
[WIRE]key.

3. Set the pulley to be measured, and attach the wire tip to the push-pull gauge.
(Refer to the figure indicated below.)
Use the push-pull gauge MAX 29.4 N(3kg).

4. Set the pre tension change to off.


Select the [DATA BANK]in the <USER PARAMETER>. Press the[ENTER].
Select the <1. SWICH 1>and press the [ENTER]. Press the [PAGE DOWN] five
times. Set the pre tension change to "off" . Press the [F0] key two times.
Then, Press [RST.].

Work Base

02C97.doc

Pulley for the measurement


Push-Pull Gauge
(Use the one with bearing
MAX29.4N (3kg)
1999-11-05
2.3.2.1 - 1E MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual 2.3.21.pm6
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.2.1 Wire tension Adjustment (2/7)

Pretension adjustment(2/3)
5. Press the [I/O] key to select the <MOTION CHECK>. Press [ENT] key.
Select the <MOTION CHECK> screen to set the following items as indicated below.
MOTION CHECK : ON
TENSION BREAK : OFF
PRETENSION BREAK : ON

6. After setting the above. Measure the initial load while slowly pulling the
push-pull gauge horizontally.
Check that the tension is less than 3.23N (330g).

7. When the tension is larger than 3.23 N(330g), clear causes.


Refer to 2.3.2.1 wire tension adjustment (5/7) wire tension initial
Causes of wire tension initial load.

8. Set the pre tension change to on.


Select the [DATA BANK]in the <USER PARAMETER>. Press the[ENTER].
Select the <1. SWICH 1>and press the [ENTER]. Press the [PAGE DOWN] five
times. Set the pre tension change to "on" . Press the [F0] key two times.
Then, Press [RST.].

Collar 6.1× 13.7


(6334180001)

Bolt, Socket 6× 70
NUT,2M6 (018067031)
(021060202)

Stand, H42 Pulley, D48


(632011001) (634181001)

1999-11-05
2.3.2.1 - 2E MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual 2.3.21.pm6
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.2.1 Wire tension Adjustment (3/7)

Pretension adjustment(3/3)
9. Press the [I/O] key to select the <MOTION CHECK>. Press [ENT] key.
Select the <MOTION CHECK> screen to set the following items as indicated
below.
MOTION CHECK : ON
TENSION BREAK : OFF
PRETENSION BREAK : ON
10.
.After setting the above. measure the pretension while slowly pulling the push-
pull gauge horizontally. Adjust the VR2 to set the tension to the pretension
value acquired in step 1. ±0.29N (30g)
(The pretension increases and decreases when the VR2 is turned counter
clockwise and clockwise respectively.)
11.
After pretension adjustment, paint-lock the VR2.

1999-11-05
2.3.2.1 - 3E MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual 2.3.21.pm6
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.2.1 Wire tension Adjustment (4/7)


Main tension adjustment
1. Adjust the pretension.

2. Perform the powder brake warm-up operation.


To start the warm-up operation enter "0" to <WIRE SPEED> and then press
the[WIRE]key.

3. Measure the diameter of the reeled wire electrode. Refer to the attached
graph (reeled wire diameter - main tension) and determine the main preten-
sion value corresponding to the diameter of the reeled wire to be used.
Refer to 2.3.2.1 Wire tension adjustment (7/7).

4. Set the pulley to be measured, and attach the wire tip to the push-pull
gauge. (Refer to the figure indicated below.)
Use the push-pull gauge MAX 29.4 N(3kg).

5. Set the pre tension change to on.


Select the [DATA BANK]in the <USER PARAMETER>. Press the[ENTER].
Select the <1. SWICH 1>and press the [ENTER]. Press the [PAGE DOWN]
five times. Set the pre tension change to "on" . Press the [F0] key two times.
Then, Press [RST.].

6. Press the [I/O] key to select the <MOTION CHECK>. Press [ENT] key.
Select the <MOTION CHECK> screen to set the following items as indicated
below.
MOTION CHECK : ON
TENSION BREAK :ON
PRETENSION BREAK : ON

7. .After setting the above. measure the pretension while slowly pulling the
push-pull gauge horizontally. Adjust the VR1 to set the tension to the
pretension value acquired in step1. .±0.29N (30g) (The pretension increases
and decreases when the VR2 is turned counter clockwise and clockwise
respectively.)

8. After pretension adjustment, paint-lock the VR1.

Tools to be used.

BOLT, SOCKET 5×30


BOLT, SOCKET 5×30
COLLAR 6.1× 70
NUT, 2M6
STAND, H42
PULLYD48
1999-11-05
2.3.2.1 - 4E MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual 2.3.21.pm6
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.2.1 Wire tension Adjustment (6/7)

Causes of wire tension initrial load error(2/2)


7. The tension push pull gauge is not calibrated
→Use a calibrated gauge.

8. The pretension brake does not work.


•The pretension brake connector is removed, or not connected securely.
→Connect it securely.
• The WD PCB or pretension brake is defective.
→Follow steps below to identify defective sections.
1. Remove the wire bobbin from the supply reel shaft.
2. Set the pretension switch to OFF.
3. On the <MOTION CHECK> screen, change the "pretension brake" setting from
ON to OFF or vice versa.
4. Rotate the supply reel shaft manually. Check that the shaft rotates easily
when the setting is ON.
5. If the shaft does not rotate easily even when the setting is ON.
Identify the defective section by following steps below.

Check that the voltage between 7P and 8 P of connector CN-W01 on the wire STD unit
with a tester. Connect the tester's red lead (+)to 7P and the black lead (-)to 8P.
Refer to Chaper 3 3.5.6 WD PCB replacement.
Is the voltage 24V when pretension brake is set to ON on the <MOTION CHECK> screen?

YES NO
Check the voltage between 1P and 2P
of connector G12 located on the wire
supply unit's rear side.
Connect the tester's red lead (+) to 1P
and the black lead (-) to 2P.

Is the voltage 24V when pretension


brake is set to ON on the <MOTION
CHECK> screen?

YES NO

Pretension brake is defective. Harness is defective. WD PCB is defective


Replace the brake. Replace CNTEN CORD Replace the unit.
Refer : 2.1.6.2 Wire reel 50A Refer to 2.2.9 WD
magnetic brake replacement. Refer to Chapter 3 PCB unit replacement.
Electrical Composition
3.4 Connector
Connection

Remeasurement of wire tension initial load.


1999-11-05
2.3.2.1 - 6E MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual 2.3.21.pm6
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.3 The automatic wire threading device


2.3.3.1 Threading limit switch adjustment (1/2)
LIMITSWITCHONTHE MACHININGSIDE
1. Select the [I/O]key in the<MOTION CHECK>. Press the[ENTER] key.
Turn on the guide movement motor on the <MOTION CHECK> screen.
If the limit switch works correctly, the turn table moves by one stroke from the
machining side to the drain side (or vice versa) after turning the guide movement
motor on.
If the limit switch has some defects, the turn table will stop 5 seconds after the
movement.

2. Adjust the Limit Switch position so that the turn table stops at the corresponding
point of the sub wire guide and the bracket wire opening when the turntable is
moved from the drain position to the machining position.
To adjust the limit switch position, loosen the screw securing the limit switch and
tighten it at the correct position.

3. When the turntable moves to the left end, make sure the turn table moves right
about 0.6mm before moving left.

4. After adjustment, the turntable should move smoothly.


When installing the wire electrode, make sure the wire does not touch the
sub -guide at the installation of the wire electrode.

screw
drain side LS

subwier guide

bracket,H32

screw
machining side LS
02C102.doc

1999-11-05 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.3.3.1:pm6
2.3.3.1 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.3.1 Threading limit switch adjustment (2/2)

LIMIT SWITCH ON THE DRAIN SIDE


1. Select the [I/O] key to press the [ENTER] key.
Turn on the guide movement motor on the <MOTION CHECK> screen.

2. Adjust the limit switch position so that the limit switch goes on immediately (0.6mm)
before the turntable reaches the left end, and the turntable does not interfere with
the limit switch when the turn table moves to the left end.
To adjust the limit switch position, loosen the screw securing the limit switch and
tighten it at the correct position.

3. After the movement, the table should move smoothly.


Make sure the wire electrode is guided to the inlet port on the bracket drain side.

1999-11-05 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.3.3.1:pm6
2.3.3.1 - 2E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.3.2 Threading wire detector adjustment (1/2)

1. Insert a Φ0.2 wire in the center of SUB WIRE GUIDE, D#2 and SUB WIRE
GUIDE, E#2 while pinching the wire with fingers. Move it slowly to the right and
left.
The range to be lit up on the right and the left side of the wire should be 2.5 mm,
when the red LED and green LED light.

2. Press the [THREAD] key to thread the Φ 0.2 wire .

3. Check that the red LED and green LED light brightly when the wire is being fed in
front of the wire detector. There may be some vibration in the wire. .

4. Press the [CUT WIRE] key to cut the wire.


Check that the red LED goes off and the green LED remains lit at the same time
when the wire disappears from the sensing area of the wire detector.

5. When the wire detector position cannot be adjusted as required above, replace
the detector and adjust it again
Refer to 2.1.9.7 Threading wire detector replacement.
* If any foreign matter, such as dust or brass particles, is stuck to the wire
detector surface or sub-guide, remove them and adjust the wire detector.

SUB WIRE GUIDE, D#2

Ø 0.2 wire tip

02C104.doc

02C103.doc

SUBWIREGUIDE,E#2 Ø 0.2 wire

1999-11-05 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.3.3.2:pm6
2.3.3.2 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.3.2 Threading wire detector adjustment (2/2)

6. When any condition of steps 2. to 8. below is not satisfied, adjust the wire
detector position appropriately, and then repeat this procedure from step 2.
When adjusting the detector, loosen the position adjustment screws, and move
the detector to the right and left or rotate it.
If it still cannot be adjusted, loosen the sensor fixing screws and move the
sensor similarly.

7. Check that the red LED (operation indication lamp) and the green LED (clear-
ance indication lamp) light brightly when a Φ0.2 wire is inserted into the wire
path of the A.W.T. unit.

8. Check that the red LED goes off and the green LED remains lit when the wire is
removed from the wire path.

9. Check that the wire tip is positioned centrally between SUB WIRE GUIDE, D#2
and SUB WIRE GUIDE, E#2 as shown in the figure below when a Φ0.2 wire is
inserted into the wire path again and the red LED is lit.

sensor fixing screws

2.5 mm or more 2.5 mm or more


reference Ø 7

02C105.doc

position adjustment screws

1999-11-05 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.3.3.2:pm6
2.3.3.2 - 2E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures HS-50A

2.3.4 B axis unit


2.3.4.1 B axis home position detection dog adjustment
1. Remove the screw, pan M4×8 (6pcs.)and the GEAR BOX B COVER

2. Loosen the screw, pan (S/P washer) M4×8 (2pcs.). Rotate the B axis to C.W. as
viewed from the GEAR BOX B AXIS and adjust the DOG so that angle A of the
Dog is 60 degree when the LIMIT SWITCH goes on.
Refer to the drawing below for angle A.

3. Tighten the screw, pan (S/P washer) M4×8 (2pcs,) to secure the dog

4. Secure the GEAR BOX B COVER with screw pan M4×8 (6pcs.)

dog

screw, pan M4×8

02C106.doc

1999-11-05 MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual2.3.4.1:pm6
2.3.4.1 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.4 Adjustment procedure (Electrical)


2.4.1 Deviation adjustment

1. Open the control door, and turn the main power breaker while pushing breaker
handle bracket.
2. The [POWER] switch on .
3. Press [MANU COND] key and make sure the jog speed.
4. Press [I/O], [1], and [ENT] key.
5. Press [PAGE DOWN] key five times to display the deviation screen.
6. Perform jog operation to move each axis.
7. Make sure the deviation in the appointed range
8. If it is not in this range,adjust the deviation volume (VR1 or VR3) of each servo
driver.

Speed Deviation
XYaxis 600mm/min 1333 ±27
UVaxis 100mm/min 267 ±5
Z axis 600mm/min 1600 ±32 VR1
B axis 20min-1 11111 ±222 X,U,Z,B axis

Control box XY servo driver


UV servo driver
Z servo driver VR3
B servo driver Y,Vaxis

XY servo driver
UV servo driver
Z servo driver
B servo driver

Tool : Phillips screw driver (small)

1999-9-10 MO89: Maintenance manual 2.4.1:pm.6


2.4.1 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.4.2 AVR1 voltage adjustment

1. Open the control door, and turn on the main power breaker while pushing
breaker handle bracket.
2. The [POWER] switch on.
3. Adjustment voltage by the variable resister on the AVR1.
Note:Don't apply paint lock.

Power source Measurement locations Voltage adjustment

Between the NC board CH17(5V) 4.85 to 5.15V


+5V
and CH15 (LG) Center 5.00V

GND
NCPCB
(CH15)

5V
(CH17)
ControlBox

AVR1

NCPCB AVR1
Variable
resister

02201.doc

Tools to be use : Multi-meter


Screw driver (small)

1999-10-18 MO89: Maintenance manual 2.4.2:pm.6


2.4.2 - 1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.4.3 Discharge power voltage check

1. Open the control door, and turn on the main power breaker while pushing
breaker handle bracket.
2. The [POWER] switch on.
3. Separate the workpiece and wire electrode sufficiently, and then press the [ELEC]
key .
4. Make sure the [WIRE HIGH VOLTAGE] LED on the control panel is on.
5. Make sure the voltage of DPU terminal box.
Note:Take care short-circuit doesn't take place.

Power Measurement locations Voltage

Main TB3-31H(+) about


Discharge TB3-1H(-) 230VDC

Sub TB4-32H(+) about


Discharge TB4-11H(-) 80VDC

Clamp TB4-7H(+) about


TB4-31H(-) 100VDC

ControlBox DPU
1H 31H

TB3

DPU 7H
31H TB4
11H
32H

02201.doc

Tools to be use : Mlti-meter

1999-10-18 MO89: Maintenance manual 2.4.3:pm.6


2.4.3-1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.4.4 Discharge clamp power voltage check

1. Open the control door, and turn on the main power breaker while pushing
breaker handle bracket.
2. The [POWER] switch on.
3. Machine a workpiece as given in machining conditions for energy compensa-
tion. (Any desired value for the energy.)
Refer to 5.14 Energy compensation.
4. After the workpiece has been machined approx. 5 mm, make sure the voltage of
DPU terminal box.
Note:Take care short-circuit doesn't take place.
5. If It isn't in below range, adjust the voltage using the variable resister VR1 of
the Clamp PCB unit.

Power Measurement locations Voltage


Discharge TB4-7H(+) 138-140VDC
Clamp TB4-31H(-)
(machining)

Control Box Clamp PCB unit DPU

DPU 7H
31H TB4

VR1

02201.doc

Tools to be use : Multi-meter


Screw driver (small)

1999-12-29 MO89: Maintenance manual 2.4.4:pm.6


2.4.4-1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.4.5 PMU unit output check

1. Open the control door, and remove connectors CN-D221,D222 and D223 from the
PMD unit.
2. Turn on the main power breaker while pushing breaker handle bracket.
3. The [POWER] switch on.
4. Connect the multi-meter 's red lead (+) to each pin (1,3,5,7) of PMD unit connec-
tors CN-D221,D222 and D223, and the black lead (-) to check terminal CH6.
Note:Take care short-circuit doesn't take place.
5. Check that the measured voltage is 2V to 15V in any location, replace the PMD
unit.

ControlBox
PMD unit

CN-D221 1pin
CN-D222
CN-D223
8pin

CH6

PMD unit

02201.doc

Tools to be use : Multi-meter

1999-10-18 MO89: Maintenance manual 2.4.5:pm.6


2.4.5-1E
Chapter2 Maintenance Operation Procedures (Electrical) HS-50A

2.4.6 Inverter error content check

Check of inverter latest error log

1. Press the [MON] key while the ARM inverter LED is lit (Water ON) to
display [Fr-*] (“*” represents “F” or “r”). Each press of the [MON] key
alternates the display from parameter indication [AU1], alarm log [Fr-*], and
operation frequency [00].
2. Press the [CUSOR UP] and [CUSOR DOWN] keys to display the screen that
[1] and [***] are displayed alternately. ([***] indicates error code).
3. The latest error code is displayed. Refer to the table below to confirm the
error contents.
4. When you have confirmed the error contents, press the [MON] keys several
times to return to the operation frequency display.

Code Contents
OC1 Overcurrent during acceleration
OC2 Overcurrent during deceleration
OC3 Overcurrent during operation
OCA Overcurrent (arm side when starting)
OCL Overcurrent (load side when starting)
OP2 Overvoltage during deceleration
OP3 Overvoltage
nOFF Insufficient voltage
OL1 Inverter overload
OL2 Motor overload
OH Overheating
E Emergency stop
EOFF Check of emergency stop
EEP1 EEPROM error
Err.1 Frequency setting signal error
Err.2 RAM error
Err.3 ROM error
Err.4 CPU error
Err.5 Communication error
C Stole protection alarm
P Overvoltage alarm
L Overload alarm

1999-10-18 MO89: Maintenance manual 2.4.6:pm.6


2.4.6- 1E
Chapter 3 Electrical System

1999-9-16 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual title:pm.6


Chapter 3 - 1E
Capter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.2 Composition and Names

Name No. Parts code Unit name Parts code PCB name Remark
Control Control 1 659652*** NC PCB ASSY A10
box system 2 659654*** GRAM MODULE ASSY A10
3 659757*** MEM UNIT A10
4 659698*** WSLV PCB ASSY A10
5 659616*** IO PCB ASSY A10
6 659704*** DC PCB ASSY A10
Wire 7 659671*** WD PCB ASSY A10
system 633814*** PHOTO COUPLER PCB ASSY EU
8 659758*** WIRE OP UNIT ASSY 50A OP PCB ASSY EU Option
635109*** PCB,OP CONNECTOR EU Option
Servo 9 659726*** XY SERVO DRIVER ASSY
system 10 659727*** UV SERVO DRIVER ASSY
11 659728*** Z SERVO DRIVER ASSY
12 659729*** B SERVO DRIVER ASSY Option
Discharge 13 633728*** PCB UNIT SUD SUD PCB ASSY
system 14 633730*** PCB UNIT PMD PMD PCB ASSY
15 633589*** PCB UNIT CLAMP CLAMP PCB ASSY
16 633724*** PMU ASSY FET16 ASSY 3 units
17 633723*** DPU ASSY
Operation panel 18 6597150** KEYBOARD ASSY J 50A KEYBOARD ASSY A10 Japan
6597151** KEYBOARD ASSY E 50A KEYBOARD ASSY A10 Except Japan
Terminal box 19 659807*** TANK PCB ASSY A10

3.2e.xls

Operation Panel
ControlBox

12 16
11 18
10
9 6
8 13
14
03201.doc
7 15
3 17
4 TerminalBox
2
19
1
5

02201.doc 03202.doc

3.2 - 1E MO89: Maintenance manual 3.2:pm.6


Capter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.4 External cables (1/2)

CONTROL BOX
X MOTOR XY DRIVER SPEED CTR 1 DRIVING MTR
14 25

MX XY IO PCB WD PCB S1 27 MWD


SD
25

Y MOTOR
15 IO PCB
CNIN
MY

SPEED CTR 2 DRIVING MTR


7
SQXP,SQXM CNSQX 26
8 S2 MCD
SQYP,SQYM CNSQY 28

26
U MOTOR UV DRIVER
17
TB1,KC2 PRETENSION
MU UV MOTOR
SD 1
CNTEN
MPT
V MOTOR
18

MV TENSION BRK
2
CNBR MPB
10
SQUP,SQUM CNSQU

11 4
SQVP,SQVM CNSQV CNKV K1

K2
Z MOTOR Z DRIVER
16 5
CNWSV K3
MZ ZSD 6
CNDRV K5

13
CNFL SL1
3
CNYB CNOF SQWF

9 TERMINAL
SQZP,SQZM CNSQZ
BOX
24
CNTANK
B MOTOR B DRIVER 23
Q9
34 19

MB BSD
W.OP.IF
PCB

12 CN-W22 CN-W31
SQB CNSQB
35
CN-W26 CN-W32
29/31
SQD1 CNDR1 CN-W21 CN-W33

30/32 36
SQD2 CNDR2 WTB-1 WTB-3
33
SQD3 CNDR3

37
CN-W24 K4
OPERATION BOX NCPCB
22
CNKEY

20
TB1
21
CNSW

3.4 - 1E MO89: Maintenance manual 3.4:pm.6


Capter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.4 External cables (2/2)

No. PARTS CODE


Q'ty PARTS NAME REMARK

1 659531001 1 CNTEN CORD, 50A


2 659532001 1 CNBR CORD, 50A
3 659535001 1 CNOF CORD, 50A
4 659536001 1 CNKV CORD, 50A
5 659540001 1 CNWSV CORD, 50A
6 659541001 1 CNDRVCORD,50A
7 659544001 1 CNSQX CORD, 50A
8 659545001 1 CNSQY CORD, 50A
9 659546001 1 CNSQZ CORD, 50A
10 659547001 1 CNSQU CORD, 50A
11 659548001 1 CNSQV CORD, 50A
12 659549001 1 CNSQB CORD, 50A OPTION
13 659571001 1 Z BRAKE CORD, 50A
14 659572001 1 X MOTOR CORD, 50A
15 659573001 1 Y MOTOR CORD, 50A
16 659574001 1 Z MOTOR CORD, 50A
17 659575001 1 U MOTOR CORD, 50A
18 659576001 1 V MOTOR CORD, 50A
19 659577001 1 B MOTOR CORD, 50A OPTION
20 659588001 1 K200 CORD, 50A
21 659589001 1 SW CORD, 50A
22 659599001 1 KEY CORD, 50A
23 659612001 1 TANK POWER CORD, 50A
24 659614001 1 TANK SIGNAL CORD, 50A
25 659780001 1 SC DM CORD, 50A
26 659781001 1 SC CM CORD, 50A
27 659803001 1 SC DTG CORD, 50A
28 659804001 1 SC CTG CORD, 50A
29 659552001 1 INTERLOCK LS ASSY, 1 STD STD
30 659554001 1 INTERLOCK LS ASSY, 2 STD STD
31 659557001 1 INTERLOCK LS ASSY, 1 EU EU
32 659553001 1 INTERLOCK LS ASSY, 2 EU EU
33 659555001 1 INTERLOCK LS ASSY, 3 EU EU
34 659808001 1 B FLEXIBLE TUBE ASSY, 50A OPTION
35 633718001 1 CN-W21/W33ASSY OPTION
36 659543001 1 CNOPW CORD, 50A OPTION
37 659764001 1 W24KVCORD,50A OPTION

3.4 - 2E MO89: Maintenance manual 3.4:pm.6


Chapter3 Electrical system HA-50A

3.5 Control device function

3.5.1 NC PCB (1/2)

NCPCB

CNIO CNROM1 CNSLV1 CNSC

GND CH28
(CH15) CH26

5V
(CH17)

LD10

CNPW
CNDIMM1
LED
CNROM2 CNSLV2

CH14

CNBAT
CG ROM LD1
CH11

CNRS CH4

CNKEY
CNEXP DIPSW
B52J090-*

Connector on the NC PCB

Connector N u m b e r Remarks Connection

CNIO 26 IO PCB control signal IOPCB


CNPW 5 Power supply input 5V AVR1
CNBAT 3 Battery power supply Battery
CNRS 8 B port for RS-232C None
CNKEY 36 Key PCB interface Key PCB
CNROM1 96 MEM PCB interface MEM PCB
CNROM2 96 MEM PCB interface MEM PCB
CNSLV1 96 WSLV PCB interface WSLVPCB
CNSLV2 48 WSLV PCB interface WSLVPCB
CNSC 48 NBUS PCB interface NBUSPCB
CNDIMM1 168 GRAM module Interface GRAMmodule
CNEXP 2 Program area expansion select signal None

1999-12-29
3.5.1 - 1E HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.1:pm.6
Chapter3 Electrical system HA-50A

3.5.1 NC PCB (2/2)

NC PCB LED explanation

Address Remarks
LD1 Local CPUcondition indication 1
LD2 Local CPUcondition indication 2
LD3 Local CPUcondition indication 3
LD4 Local CPUcondition indication 4
LD5 M-LINKerror
LD6 M-LINK run
LD7 Main CPUcondition indication 1
LD8 Main CPUcondition indication 2
LD9 Main CPUcondition indication 3
LD10 Main CPUcondition indication 4

NC PCB CHECK PIN explanation

Address Remarks
CH4 CLKOUT
CH11 MR
CH14 VBAT
CH15 GND
CH17 5V
CH27 PCLK
CH28 BCLK

Function of NC PCB

1. LocalCPU (Man-Machineinterface)
1. Editing
2. Key input (RS-232C)
3. Display

2. Main CPU (Operationcommand)


1. Operation command
2. Management of alarm
3. External I/O signal

1999-12-29
3.5.1 - 2E HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.1:pm.6
Chapter7 Electrical system HS-50A

3.5.2 MEM PCB

MEM PCB
Version (Solder side)
HS-50A is [A10-****]

B52J073-*

CNROM1 CNROM2

Conector on the MEM PCB

Connector N u m b e r Remarks Connection

CNROM1 96 NC PCB interface NCPCB


CNROM2 96 NC PCB interface NCPCB

Function of the MEM PCB

The MEM PCB is equipped with a Flash memory storing the system program for
local CPU, main CPU and slave CPU operations.

1999-10-19
3.5.2 - 1E HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.2:pm.6
Chapter3 Electrical system
Chapter7 HS-50A

3.5.3 WSLV PCB (1/2)

WSLVPCB

+15V AG -15V P24B P0B


(CH12) (CH11) (CH10) (CH9) (CH8)

CNXY
CNVERT CNPWS
CNSLV1 CNUV

CNZ

CNWD

CNLX

CNLY
CNSLV2

DIPSW CH4
PC-02A
CH3
WIRE ROM PC-02B

LD1 LD10

CNB
LED
GND +5V
(CH2) (CH1)

Connector of the WSLV PCB


Connector N u m b e r Remarks Connection

CNSLV1 96 NC PCB interface NCPCB


CNSLV2 48 NC PCB interface NCPCB
CNXY 26 Servo driver interface XY axis driver
CNUV 26 Servo driver interface UV axis driver
CNZ 26 Servo driver interface Z axis driver
CNB 26 Servo driver interface B axis driver
CNWD 20 WD PCB interface WDPCB
CNLX 15 Linear scale signal input X axis linear scale
CNLY 15 Linear scale signal input Y axis linear scale
PC-02A 1 FETON signal DCPCB
PC-02B 1 DSRTN signal DCPCB
CNVERT 4 Vertical alignment signal DCPCB
CNPWS 5 ±15V,±24V power supply TB1

1999-10-19
3.5.3 - 1E HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.3:pm.6
Chapter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.5.3 WSLV PCB (2/2)

WSLV PCB LED explanation

Address Remarks
LD1 Slave CPUcondition indication 1
LD2 Slave CPUcondition indication 2
LD3 Slave CPUcondition indication 3
LD4 Slave CPUcondition indication 4
LD5 M-LINKerror
LD6 M-LINK run
LD7 Wire CPUcondition indication 1
LD8 Wire CPUcondition indication 2
LD9 Wire CPUcondition indication 3
LD10 Wire CPUcondition indication 4

WSLV PCB CHECK PIN explanation

Address Remarks
CH1 +5V(5VDC)
CH2 GND(5VDC)
CH3 FETON
CH4 DISRTN
CH8 P0B(24VDC)
CH9 P24B(24VDC)
CH10 -15V(Analog)
CH11 AG(Analog)
CH12 +15V(Analog)

Function of WSL PCB

1. Slave CPU
1. Axis control (total 6 axis)
2. Pulse count of manual pulse generator

2. WireCPU
1. Wire drive control
2. Tank control

3. Discharge pulse control

1999-10-19
3.5.3 - 2E HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.3:pm.6
Chapter7 Electrical system HS-50A

3.5.4 GRAM Module

GRAM Module

(CNDIMM1) B52J091-*

Conector on the GRAM Module

Connector Number Remarks Connection

CNDIMM1 168 NC PCB interface NCPCB

Function of the GRAM Module

The GRAM module is equipped with a memory storing for graphic indication.

1999-10-19
3.5.4 - 1E HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.4:pm.6
Chapter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.5.5 IO PCB (2/3)

Connector on the IO PCB

Connector Number Remarkes Connection


CNIO 26 NC PCB interface NCPCB
CNEXIO 26 EXIO PCB interface EXIOPCB
CNSQX 4 X axis limit SW X axis limit SW
CNSQY 4 Y axis limit SW Y axis limit SW
CNSQZ 4 Z axis limit SW Z axis limit SW
CNSQU 4 U axis limit SW U axis limit SW
CNSQV 4 V axis limit SW V axis limit SW
CNSQB 4 B axis limit SW B axis limit SW
CNSV 4 Power supply input P24C AVR5
CNTYPE 8 For machine type selection None
CNIN 8 Cutting motor thermal Cutting motor thermal
CNOUT 8 Reserve output None
CNYB 2 Z axis brake Z axis brake
CNSW 12 Operation panel SW, LED Operation panel
CNPW 5 Power supply input DC24 AVR4
CNWD24 2 Power supply output P24B WDPCB
CNSL24 2 Power supply output P24B WSLVPCB
CNEX24 2 Power supply output P24B EXIOPCB
CNDR1 4 Door interlock SW Side door SW
CNDR2 4 Door interlock SW Front door SW
CNDR3 4 Door interlock SW Front-below door SW(EU)
CNMG 3 KD1coil KD1
CNAC 3 KC1,KC2coil KC1,KC2
CN100 2 Power supply input 100A TB1
CN200 3 Power supply input 200A KC2,TB4
CNPAT1 2 Indication lump 100V Indication lump
CNPAT2 6 Indication lump 24V Indication lump
CNMA 3 Main discharge anti-surge input KD1
CNMB 3 Main discharge anti-surge output KD1
CNCSA 4 Sub discharge, clamp power supply input T1
CNCSB 4 Sub discharge, clamp power supply output DPU
PC-11A 1 SerialcommunicationRXD DCPCB
PC-11B 1 Serial communication TXD DCPCB
PC-11C 1 SerialcommunicationRDY DCPCB
XTIO 12 External SW External SW

1999-10-19
3.5.5 - 2E HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.5:pm.6
Chapter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.5.5 IO PCB (3/3)

IO PCB LED explanation

Address Remarks
LED1 M-LINKerror
LED2 M-LINK run

IO PCB CHECK PIN explanation

No. Address Remarks


1 DC24 24VDC
2 P0B GND(24VDC)
3 P24B 24VDC
4 TXD Serial communication TXD
5 RDY SerialcommunicationRDY
6 RXD SerialcommunicationRXD
7 DC5 5VDC

1999-10-19
3.5.5 - 3E HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.5:pm.6
Chapter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.5.6 WD PCB (1/2)

WDPCB

CNOPW CN100 CN100S

CNWSV
CNWDM
CNKV
F1
CNDRV

CN24C CNWCM

CN24B

VR2 14
4 3

13
12
11
10 2
9 CNOP
CNTEN 1
VR1
8

CNBR

7 6 5
CNFL

CNOF

CNTANK CNWD

1999-10-19
3.5.6 - 1E HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.6:pm.6
Chapter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.5.6 WD PCB (2/2)

Connector on the WD PCB

Connector Number Remarks Connection


CN100 2 Power supply input 100C KC2,TB1
CN100S 2 Power supply output 100C None
CNOPW 7 Wire OP PCB power supply Wire OP PCB
CNWSV 2 Water supply valve Water supply valve
CNKV 4 Machining, threading valve Machining, threading valve
CNDRV 2 Drain valve Drain valve
CN24C 6 Power supply input P24C AVR5
CN24B 4 Power supply input P24B IOPCB
CNWDM 7 Driving motor Driving motor
CNWCM 6 Cutting motor Cutting motor
CNTEN 10 Pre-tensionmotor Pre-tensionmotor
CNBR 6 Tension brake Tension brake
CNFL 3 Float SW Float SW
CNOF 3 Wire scrap detection sensor Wire scrap detection sensor
CNTANK 20 TANK PCB interface TANK PCB
CNWD 26 WSLV PCB interface WSLVPCB
CNOP 16 Wire OP PCB interface Wire OP PCB

WD PCB LED explanation

No. Address Remarks


1 LED1 M-LINK(2nd)error
2 LED2 M-LINK (2nd) run
3 LED3 M-LINK (1st) error
4 LED4 M-LINK (1st) run

WD PCB CHECK PIN explanation

No. Address Remarks


5 CH1 SerialcommunicationRXD
6 CH2 SerialcommunicationRDY
7 CH3 Serial communication TXD
8 CH4 Tension brake output
9 CH5 Pre-tension motor output
10 CH6 Tension brake feedback
11 CH7 Pre-tension motor feedback
12 CH8 GND(5VDC)
13 CH9 5VDC
14 CH10 M-LINK (1st) run

1999-10-19
3.5.6 - 2E HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.6:pm.6
Chapter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.5.7 Servo Driver (1/2)

Servo Driver
(XY,UV,Z,Baxis)

CH9(P24)
F1
CH10(P0)
LD8
CH8(VCC)
CH11(GND)
CNPW CH12(P15)
CH13(AG)
CH14(N15)
CNSC

LD1

LD2
VR1
LD6
LD3 VR2
LD4 VR3
LD7
VR4
LD5

CNMTR1

CNMTR2

1999-10-19
3.5.7 - 1E HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.7:pm.6
Chapter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.5.7 Servo Driver (2/2)

Connector on the Servo Driver

Connector Number Remarks Connection


CNPW 8 Power supply input 5, ±15, 24VDC TB1
CNSC 26 WSLV PCB interface WSLVPCB
CNMTR1 18 Motor power, encorder signal (1st) Motor power, Encorder (1st)
CNMTR2 18 Motor power, encorder signal (2nd) Motor power, Encorder (2nd)

1st : X, U, Z, B axis
2nd : Y, V axis

Servo Driver LED explanation

Address Remarks
LD1 Power supply input (5, ±15VDC)
LD2 1st over current
LD3 1st over speed
LD4 2nd over current
LD5 2nd over speed
LD6 1st overload (10ms,2s)
LD7 2nd overload (10ms,2s)
LD8 Power supply input (24VDC)
VR1 1st speed control scale adjustment
VR2 1st speed control offset adjustment
VR3 2nd speed control scale adjustment
VR4 2nd speed control offset adjustment

Servo Driver CHECK PIN explanation

Address Remarks
CH8 5VDC
CH9 24VDC
CH10 GND(24VDC)
CH11 GND(5VDC)
CH12 15VDC
CH13 GND(±15VDC)
CH14 -15VDC

1999-10-19
3.5.7 - 2E HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.7:pm.6
Chapter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.5.8 DC PCB (1/2)

DCPCB

PC-11A

PC-11B

PC11C

CN-D02 7

PC-12A

PC-12B

8
9
10 1 2 3 4 JP1
JP2
12 JP3
11
VR1

CN-D05

CN-D04
CN-D03

F1

13
14

1999-10-19
3.5.8 - 1E HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.8:pm.6
Chapter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.5.8 DC PCB (2/2)

Connector on the DC PCB

Connector Number Remarks Connection


PC-11A 1 SerialcommunicationRXD IOPCB
PC-11B 1 Serial communication TXD IOPCB
PC-11C 1 SerialcommunicationRDY IOPCB
PC-12A 1 FETON signal WSLVPCB
PC-12B 1 DISRTN signal WSLVPCB
CN-D01 4 DC Power supply DPU
CN-D02 40 SUD control signal SUD unit
CN-D03 16 PMD control signal PMD unit
CN-D04 8 Power supply relation error detection Clamp unit
CN-D05 4 Vertical alignment signal WSLVPCB

DC PCB LED explanation

No. Address Remarks


1 LED1 Control power supply 5VDC
2 LED2 M-LINKerror
3 LED3 M-LINK run
4 LED4 Wire break

DC PCB CHECK PIN explanation

No. Address Remarks


5 CH1 SerialcommunicationRXD
6 CH2 Serial communication TXD
7 CH3 FETON signal
8 CH4 DISRTN signal
9 CH5 M-LINKerror
10 CH6 Pulse delay output (OUT)
11 CH7 Discharge on sense signal (SGX)
12 CH8 Main pulse ON (MON)
13 CH9 GND(P5A)
14 CH10 P5A

1999-10-19
3.5.8 - 2E HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.8:pm.6
Chapter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.5.9 PMD PCB (1/2)

PMD PCB

CN-D221

CN-D222

CN-D223

1
2
3

CN-D241
CN-D23

CN-D242

12
CN-D243 11
13
4
14 10
15

CN-D21

1999-10-19
3.5.9 - 1E HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.9:pm.6
Chapter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.5.9 PMD PCB (2/2)

Connector on the PMD PCB

Connector Number Remarks Connection


CN-D21 2 PMD power supply DPU
CN-D221 8 PMU1 drive signal PMU1
CN-D222 8 PMU2 drive signal PMU2
CN-D223 8 PMU3 drive signal PMU3
CN-D23 16 PMD control signal (DC) DCPCB
CN-D241 6 PMU1 FET damage signal PMU1
CN-D242 6 PMU2 FET damage signal PMU2
CN-D243 6 PMU3 FET damage signal PMU3

PMD PCB LED explanation

No. Address Remarks


1 LED1 PMU1 damage
2 LED2 PMU2 damage
3 LED3 PMU3 damage
4 LED4 15V power supply for FET drive

PMD PCB CHECK PIN explanation

No. Address Remarks


10 CH1 15VDC
11 CH2 5VDC
12 CH3 GND
13 CH4 GND
14 CH5 15VDC for FET drive
15 CH6 GND for FET drive

1999-10-19
3.5.9 - 2E HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.9:pm.6
Chapter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.5.10 SUD PCB (1/2)

SUDPCB

CN-D15

4
5
6
7 CN-D12
8
10
11
CN-D16

CN-D13

CN-D14
9

12
1
13
14
2
15
16
3
17
CN-D11

1999-10-19
3.5.10-1E HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.10:pm.6
Chapter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.5.10 SUD PCB (2/2)

Connector on the SUD PCB

Connector Number Remarks Connection


CN-D11 6 SUD power supply DPU
CN-D12 40 SUD control signal (DC) DCPCB
CN-D13 9 PMU overheating , fuse detection PMU1, 2, 3
CN-D14 5 Wire cutting disable, Operation panel, Below arm
overheating detection Cutting unit, Thermal
CN-D15 11 Sub-discharge power supply, TB1, DPU
PMU relay on PMU1, 2, 3
CN-D16 2 Wire break detection signal TB4

SUD PCB LED explanation

No. Address Remarks


1 LED1 Wire breaking detection circuit power supply
2 LED2 Control power supply
3 LED3 Dielectric breakdown detection circuit power supply
4 LED4 PMU1 relay on signal
5 LED5 PMU2 relay on signal
6 LED6 PMU3 relay on signal
7 LED7 Machining on signal
8 LED8 While finishig
9 LED9 While wire break

SUD PCB CHECK PIN explanation

No. Address Remarks


10 CH1 FETON signal
11 CH2 GND(G0A)
12 CH3 P12C
13 CH4 GND(G0C)
14 CH5 P12B
15 CH6 GND(G0B)
16 CH7 P12A
17 CH8 GND(G0A)

1999-10-19
3.5.10-2E HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.10:pm.6
Chapter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.5.11 CLP/R PCB (1/2)

CLP/RPCB

CN-D47

CN-D48

CN-D49

CN-D44 11

1
2
3
4
10

CN-D41

1999-10-19
3.5.11-1E HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.11:pm.6
Chapter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.5.11 CLP/R PCB (2/2)

Connector on the CLP/R PCB

Connector Number Remarks Connection


CN-D41 2 CLP/R power supply DPU
CN-D44 8 Machining power supply relation error detection DCPCB
CN-D47 6 Clamp circuit capacitor DPU
CN-D48 6 Clampcircuitresister Resister
CN-D49 7 Machining power supply input DPU

CLP/R PCB LED, VR explanation

No. Address Remarks


10 LED1 Control power supply
11 VR1 Clamp voltage adjustment

CLP/R PCB CHECK PIN explanation

No. Address Remarks


1 CH1 Clamp voltage (Divided voltage signal)
2 CH2 Clamp voltage abnormality signal
3 CH-12V P12A
4 CH-0V GND(P0A)

1999-10-19
3.5.11-2E HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.11:pm.6
Chapter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.5.12 Key PCB (1/2)

Key PCB

1 23 45
CNBKLT CNLCDRV

10
11

12
13
CN5V 14

67 F1
9
8

CNKSW

CNKEY CNRS CNPUL CNPWALM

1999-10-19
3.5.12-1E HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.12:pm.6
Chapter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.5.12 Key PCB (2/2)

Connector on the Key PCB

Connector Number Remarks Connection


CNKEY 40 NC PCB interface NCPCB
CN5V 5 Power supply input 5V,12V AVR3
CNKSW 4 Edit SW Edit SW
CNRS 10 RS232Cinterface RS232C
CNPUL 12 Manual pulse generator Manual pulse generator
CNPWALM 3 Power abnormality LED input IOPCB
CNLCDRV 15 LCDinterface LCD
CNBKLT 5 LCDback-light LCD inverter

Key PCB LED explanation

No. Address Remarks


1 LED40 Power supply 5VDC
2 LED39 M-LINK (1st) run
3 LED38 M-LINK (1st) error
4 LED37 M-LINK (2nd) run
5 LED36 M-LINK(2nd)error

Key PCB CHECK PIN explanation

No. Address Remarks


6 +5V 5VDC
7 +12V 12VDC
8 0V GND
9 LCDPW LCD power supply
10 TXD1 Serial communication (1st) TXD
11 RDY1 Serial communication (1st) RDY
12 RDY2 Serial communication (2nd) RDY
13 TXD2 Serial communication (2nd) TXD
14 RXD SerialcommunicationRXD

1999-10-19
3.5.12-2E HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.12:pm.6
Chapter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.5.13 Tank PCB (1/2)

Tank PCB

CN-T02

F2 F1
A sticker for the
distinction
[659807]

1
4 CN-T06
CN-T08 2
CN-T03
3
CN-T04
CN-T05

CN-T01

1999-11-04
3.5.13-1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.13:pm.6
Chapter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.5.14 Wire OP PCB (1/2)

Wire OP PCB

CN-W21 1
2 WTB1
3

CN-W22

CN-W23

CN-W24

CN-W25

CN-W26

F1
CN-W27
11
12
F2
CN-W28

1999-11-04
3.5.14-1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.14:pm.6
Chapter3 Electrical system HS-50A

3.5.15 EXIO PCB

EXIOPCB

ConectorCNEXIO

Terminal
XTEXO

Running LED
RUN
ERR
OUTCOM 24VIN

ConectorCNEX24
Terminal
XTEXI

TerminalXTEXPW

* Refer to Installation manual 5.3 Extend IO board

1999-12-29
3.5.15 - 1E MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual 3.5.15:pm.6
Chapter 4 Wiring Diagrams

1999-11-11 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual title:pm.6


Chapter 4 - 1E
Chapter5 Diagnosis by NC unit, etc. HS-50A

Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit, etc.


5.1 Counter display
When the [I/O], [1], [ENTER], [PAGE UP] and [PAGE UP] keys are pressed in
this order,<DIAG> screen is displayed and measured values of various counters are
indicated in the following cycles.
• Open voltage period 1 time/sec.
• Discharge frequency 1 time/sec.
• Water conductivity counter value 1 time/sec.

5.1.1 Open voltage period display

The total of open voltage time counted for one second (from machining power on
to discharge detection) is indicated.
When the [ELEC] key is off, the value is about "50000".
When the [ELEC] key is on, the value decrease as the machining load increases.

5.1.2 Discharge frequency display

Discharge frequency counted for one second is indicated. When the [ELEC] key
is off, "0" is indicated. When the [ELEC] key is on, the value increases as the
machining load increases.

5.1.3 Water conductivity counter value display

Water conductivity frequency counted for one second is indicated.


Table 5-1-1 shows the relation among counter value, water conductivity level
display and actual conductivity.
Table 5-1-2 shows the relation between the commanded conductivity and ion
exchange unit solenoid valve on/off motion.

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual 5.1:pm.6


5.1 - 1E
Chapter5 Diagnosis by NC unit, etc. HS-50A

Table 5-1-1 Water conductivity level

Water conductivity Water conductivity level Conductivity (µS /mm)


frequency (Hz)
26214 ~ + 300~
1684 ~ 26214 + 10 ~ 300
1515 ~ 1683 9 9~ 10
1346 ~ 1514 8 8~9
1177 ~ 1345 7 7~8
1008 ~ 1176 6 6~7
839 ~ 1007 5 5~6
670 ~ 838 4 4~ 5
501 ~ 669 3 3~4
332 ~ 500 2 2~3
163 ~ 331 1 1~2
82 ~ 162 0 0.5~ 1
0 ~ 81 - 0 ~ 0.5

Table 5-1-2 Ion exchange unit

Commanded Ion exchange unit solenoid valve frequency (Hz)


Conductivity (µS /mm)
conductivity
Go on Go off
0 130 or more 95 or less 0.6 ~ 0.8
1 280 or more 229 or less 1.4 ~ 1.7
2 449 or more 398 or less 2.4 ~ 2.7
3 618 or more 567 or less 3.4 ~ 3.7
4 787 or more 736 or less 4.4 ~ 4.7
5 956 or more 905 or less 5.4 ~ 5.7
6 1125 or more 1074 or less 6.4 ~ 6.7

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual 5.1:pm.6


5.1 - 2E
Chapter5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.2 Data display on taper cutting

When the [I/O], [1], [ENTER], [PAGE UP]and [PAGE UP] keys are pressed in
this order,<DIAG> screen is displayed and the following data on taper cutting are
indicated:

• VERTICAL OFFSET VALUE U AXIS


• VERTICAL OFFSET VALUE V AXIS
• COMBINED U/L W.G. SPANS
• LOWER GUIDE HEIGHT

The indication is renewed when vertical alignment is completed.


Set "PARAMETER CHANGE" to 1, the data for those items indicated above can be
reset .

1999-12-24 MO:89 HS-50A Maintenance manual e5.2.pm.6


5.2 - 1E
Chapter5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.3 Pitch compensation display

When the [I/O], [1], [ENTER] keys and five times for the [PAGE UP] key are
pressed in this order, the <SLAVE DISPLAY 2> screen is displayed and the pitch
error compensation amount is indicated.

Accumulated pitch error compensation data of each axis preset on the <MACHINE
PARAMETER>, 4.pitch error compensation screen is indicated in real-time.
Compensation amount of X, Y, U, V and B axes are accumulated based on the
machine zero position.
Compensation amount of Z axis is accumulated based on the "stroke 1 Z axis (+)"
position.

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual 5.3:pm.6


5.3 - 1E
Chapter5 Diagnosis by NC unit, etc. HS-50A

5.4 Servo deviation amount display

When the [I/O], [1], [ENTER] keys and five times for the [PAGE UP] key are
pressed in this order,<SLAVE DISPLAY 1> screen is displayed and the servo
deviation amount is indicated.

When the table is stopped, deviation of each axis is 0 ± 1.


When the table is moving, deviation depending on the feed rate is indicated. Table
5-4-1 shows the relation between feed rate and deviation.
Refer to MAINTENANCE MANUAL, 2.4.1 Deviation adjustment

Table 5-4-1 Servo deviation

Axis Table feed (rotation) rate Servo deviation

X, Y 600 (mm/min) 1333P


U, V 100 (mm/min) 267P
Z 600(mm/min) 1600P
B 20 (min-1) 11111P

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual 5.4.pm.6


5.4 - 1E
Chapter5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc HS-50A

5.5 Description of <IO> screen

Input signals to the NC unit and output signals from the NC unit can be displayed
by pressing the [IO] key. Consequently, the operator can determine the machine
and NC unit operation status druing the meintenance or servicing..

MAIN1 INPUT/OUTPUT
IN OUT
FEDCBA987 6 5 43210 FEDCBA987 6 5 43210
1 0000000011100000 1 0000101110000101

2 0010000000000000 2 0000000000011011

3 0000000011000100 3 0000000000000000

4 0000011000000000 4 0000011000000001

5 0110000000000000 5 0000001000000000

6 1010000000000000 6 0000000000000000

7 0000001111110101 7 0000000000010000

8 0000000001100000 8 0000000000000000

9 0000 0000 0110 0000 9 0000000010010110


FEDCBA98 7654 3210 FEDCBA987 6 5 43210

OUTPUT _
I/O
MENU
F0 F1 F2 F3 F4

NO.
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
INPUT 0
OUTPUT

An asterisk (*) after each signal indicates that the signal is negative logic
(effective when bit is “0”).
“Default” indicates the state when the machine has started correctly.
“-“ indicates that the status varies depending on the settings.

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual e5.5.pm.6


5.5 - 1E
Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.6 I/O (Main) (1/19)

MAIN 1: INPUT 1

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 0
01 0
02 0
03 *BATER *Battery error 1
04 0
05 MSEL Machine selection 0
06 *ROMSEL *ROM select 1
07 0
08 DIPSW 0 Dip Switch input 0 0
09 DIPSW 1 Dip Switch input 1 0
0A DIPSW 2 Dip Switch input 2 0
0B DIPSW 3 Dip Switch input 3 0
0C *EXIO 1 *EX IO (5th station) provided 1
0D CRAMSEL Fixed to H (Enlargement) 1
0E 0
0F 0

MAIN 1: INPUT 2
No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 CPUERM CPU error (master) 0 CPU internal error


01 CPUERS CPU error (slave) 0 CPU internal error
02 CPUERL CPU error (local) 0 CPU internal error
03 0
04 *ALMINT *Alarm interrupt 1 Alarm interrupt
05 0
06 0
07 *BYFSM *Flash busy 1 Flash busy
08 0
09 0
0A 0
0B 0
0C 0
0D 0
0E 0
0F 0

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A.MaintenanceManual:5.6:pm.6
5.6- 1E
Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.6 I/O (Main) (2/19)

MAIN 1: INPUT 3

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 0
01 0
02 0
03 0
04 0
05 0
06 0
07 0
08 0
09 0
0A 0
0B 0
0C 0
0D 0
0E 0
0F 0

MAIN 1: INPUT 4

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 RELEASE Release key. 0 “1” when [RELEASE] key is pressed .


01 RESET Reset key. 0 “1” when [RESET] key is pressed.
02 SHIFT Shift key. 0 “1” when [SHIFT] key is pressed.
03 MANU Manu (manual). 0 “1” when [MANU] key is pressed.
04 MDI MDI. 0 “1” when [MDI] key is pressed.
05 MEMOK Memory operation. 0 “1” when [MEMORY] key is pressed.
06 EDIT Edit. 0 “1” when [EDIT] key is pressed.
07 0
08 JOG+X Jog key +X/U 0 “1” when [JOG] key is pressed.
09 JOG-X Jog key -X/U 0 “1” when [JOG] key is pressed.
0A JOG+Y Jog key +Y/U 0 “1” when [JOG] key is pressed.
0B JOG-Y Jog key -Y/U 0 “1” when [JOG] key is pressed.
0C JOG+Z Jog key +Z/U 0 “1” when [JOG] key is pressed.
0D JOG-Z Jog key -Z/U 0 “1” when [JOG] key is pressed.
0E 0
0F 0

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A.MaintenanceManual:5.6:pm.6
5.6- 2E
Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.6 I/O (Main) (3/19)

MAIN 1: INPUT 5

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 R0 Key matrix lead signal 0. 0 Key matrix lead signal.on the board.
01 R1 Key matrix lead signal 1. 0
02 R2 Key matrix lead signal 2. 0
03 R3 Key matrix lead signal 3. 0
04 R4 Key matrix lead signal 4. 0
05 R5 Key matrix lead signal 5. 0
06 R6 Key matrix lead signal 6. 0
07 R7 Key matrix lead signal 7. 0
08 R8 Key matrix lead signal 8. 0
09 R9 Key matrix lead signal 9. 0
0A R10 Key matrix lead signal 10. 0
0B R11 Key matrix lead signal 11. 0
0C 0
0D 0
0E 0
0F 0

MAIN 1: INPUT 6

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 STA Start SW. 0 “1” when [START SW] key is pressed.


01 STOP Stop SW. 0 “1” when [STOP SW] key is pressed.
02 0
03 KEYPRT Mode select SW. 0
04 0
05 0
06 0
07 0
08 0
09 0
0A 0
0B 0
0C 0
0D 0
0E 0
0F 0

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A.MaintenanceManual:5.6:pm.6
5.6- 3E
Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.6 I/O (Main) (4/19)

MAIN 1: INPUT 7

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 0
01 0
02 0
03 0
04 0
05 0
06 PULSC1 Manual Puls generator scale 1. 1
07 PULSC2 Manual Puls generator scale 2. 1
08 PULAX1 Manual Puls generator axis selection 1. 1
09 PULAX2 Manual Puls generator axis selection 2. 1
0A PULAX3 Manual Puls generator axis selection 3. 0
0B PULAX4 Manual Puls generator axis selection 4. 0
0C OPT0 Input reserve 0. 0
0D OPT1 Input reserve 1. 0
0E OPT2 Input reserve 2. 0
0F OPT3 Input reserve 3. 0

PULSC2 PULSC1 Function

0 0 X1
0 1 X10

1 0 X50

1 1

PULAX4 PULAX3 PULAX2 PULAX1 Function


0 0 0 0 X axis
0 0 1 0 Y axis
0 0 0 1 Z axis
0 0 1 1 palser OFF
0 0 1 1 B axis
0 1 1 1 Not connected

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A.MaintenanceManual:5.6:pm.6
5.6- 4E
Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.6 I/O (Main) (5/19)

MAIN 1: INPUT 8

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 EXSTART External start. 0


01 EXSTOP External stop. 0
02 EXRESET External reset. 0
03 0
04 *DRCLOSE *Door close. 0
05 *MPALM *Discharge power defective. 1
06 0
07 0
08 MSEL0 Machine select signal 0. 0
09 MSEL1 Machine select signal 1. 0
0A MSEL2 Machine select signal 2. 0
0B MSEL3 Machine select signal 3. 0
0C 0
0D 0
0E 0
0F

MAIN 1: INPUT 9

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 +X Over run +X. 0


01 -X Over run -X. 0
02 +Y Over run +Y. 0
03 -Y Over run -Y. 0
04 +Z Over run +Z. 0
05 -Z Over run -Z. 0
06 +U Over run +U. 0
07 -U Over run -U. 0
08 +V Over run +V. 0
09 -V Over run -V. 0
0A BLS Zero point limit B. 0
0B OTLCH All axes over latch. 0
0C 200VER 200V power supply error. 0
0D 100VER 100V power supply error. 0
0E 0
0F 0

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A.MaintenanceManual:5.6:pm.6
5.6- 5E
Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.6 I/O (Main) (7/19)

MAIN 2: INPUT 3

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 0
01 *VERTU *Upper edge sence interrupt enable. 1
02 *VERTL *Lower edge sence interrupt enable. 1
edge alignment
03 1
04 *ISOP *Pipe isolation error. 1
05 0
06 *WBRK *Wire break. 1
07 0
08 0
09 0
0A 0
0B 0
0C *DPWER 1 *Discharge unit power error 1. 1
0D *DPWER 2 *Discharge unit power error 2. 1
0E *DPWER 3 *Discharge unit power error 3. 1
0F *DPWER 4 *Discharge unit power error 4. 1

MAIN 2: INPUT 4

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 Pi203 Programable input (203). 0


01 Pi234 Programable input (204). 0
02 Pi205 Programable input (205). 0
03 Pi206 Programable input (206). 0
04 Pi207 Programable input (207). 0
05 Pi208 Programable input (208). 0
06 Pi209 Programable input (209). 0
07 Pi210 Programable input (210). 0
08 Pi213 Programable input (213). 0
09 Pi214 Programable input (214). 0
0A Pi215 Programable input (215). 0
0B Pi216 Programable input (216). 0
0C Pi217 Programable input (217). 0
0D Pi218 Programable input (218). 0
0E Pi219 Programable input (219). 0
0F Pi220 Programable input (220). 0

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A.MaintenanceManual:5.6:pm.6
5.6- 7E
Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.6 I/O (Main) (8/19)

MAIN 2: INPUT 5

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 0
01 0
02 0
03 0
04 0
05 0
06 0
07 0
08 0
09 0
0A 0
0B 0
0C 0
0D 0
0E 0
0F 0

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A.MaintenanceManual:5.6:pm.6
5.6- 8E
Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.6 I/O (Main) (10/19)


MAIN 1: OUTPUT 3

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 SL 0 LED scan 0. 1
01 SL 1 LED scan 1. -
02 LV 1 Level meter LED 1. 0
03 LV 2 Level meter LED 2. 0
04 LV 3 Level meter LED 3. 0
05 LV 4 Level meter LED 4. 0
06 LV 5 Level meter LED 5. 0
07 LV 6 Level meter LED 6. 0
08 LV 7 Level meter LED 7. 0
09 LV 8 Level meter LED 8. 0
0A LV 9 Level meter LED 9. 0
0B LV 10 Level meter LED 10. 0
0C LD 1 Short circuit prevention. 0
0D LD 2 Machining power supply. 0
0E LD 3 Contact. 0
0F LD 4 0

MAIN 1: OUTPUT 4

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 STALED Start LED. 0 Operation panel/start lamp drive signal.


01 STPLED Stop LED. 0 Operation panel/stop lamp drive signal.
02 0
03 BUZZ Buzzeer. 0 Operation panel/external start lamp
drive signal.
04 0
05 0
06 0
07 0
08 CONT1 LCD contrast signal 1. 0 Adjusts the display contrast.
09 CONT2 LCD contrast signal 2. 0
0A CONT4 LCD contrast signal 4. 0
0B CONT8 LCD contrast signal 8. 0
0C 0
0D 0
0E 0
0F 0

CONTRAST Deep(dark) CONTRAST Light(bright)

SIGNAL 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

CONT 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1
CONT 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
CONT 4 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
CONT 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A.MaintenanceManual:5.6:pm.6
5.6- 10E
Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.6 I/O (Main) (11/19)

MAIN 1: OUTPUT 5

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 POFFOUT Power off. 0


01 MPON Discharge power on. 0
02 PSON 24V Power on. 1
03 RED Indication lamp red. 0
04 YEL Indication lamp yellow. 0
05 GRN Indication lamp green. 0
06 0
07 OTRELS OT release. 0
08 STOUT Start signal output. 0
09 0
0A OTRELS 2 OT release 2 (zero point return). 0
0B 0
0C PO 0 Output reserve 0. 0
0D PO 1 Output reserve 1. 0
0E PO 2 Output reserve 2. 0
0F PO 3 Output reserve 3. 0

MAIN 1: OUTPUT 6

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 PMSEL 1 Power module select signal 1. 1


01 PMSEL 2 Power module select signal 2. 1
02 PMSEL 3 Power module select signal 3. 1
03 ESEL 4 Discharge energy select signal 5. 1
04 0
05 DSET Data set. 0
06 DISON Discharge on. 0
07 DERDHK Power check during machining. 0
08 ECNTL 0 Discharge energy select signal 0. 0
09 ECNTL 1 Discharge energy select signal 1. 0
0A ECNTL 2 Discharge energy select signal 2. 0
0B ECNTL 3 Discharge energy select signal 3. 0
0C ECNTL 4 Discharge energy select signal 4. 0
0D ECNTL 5 Discharge energy select signal 5. 0
0E ECNTL 6 Discharge energy select signal 6. 0
0F ECNTL 7 Discharge energy select signal 7. 0

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A.MaintenanceManual:5.6:pm.6
5.6- 11E
Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.6 I/O (Main) (12/19)

MAIN 1: OUTPUT 7
No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 CONT Main power contact relay on. 0


01 SENS Discharge sence level select. 0
02 0
03 0
04 0
05 0
06 0
07 0
08 0
09 0
0A 0
0B 0
0C 0
0D 0
0E 0
0F 0

MAIN 1: OUTPUT 8

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 PO303 Programable output (303). 0


01 PO334 Programable output (304). 0
02 PO305 Programable output (305). 0
03 PO306 Programable output (306). 0
04 PO307 Programable output (307). 0
05 PO308 Programable output (308). 0
06 PO309 Programable output (309). 0
07 PO310 Programable output (310). 0
08 PO313 Programable output (313). 0
09 PO314 Programable output (314). 0
0A PO315 Programable output (315). 0
0B PO316 Programable output (316). 0
0C PO317 Programable output (317). 0
0D PO318 Programable output (318). 0
0E PO319 Programable output (319). 0
0F PO320 Programable output (320). 0

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A.MaintenanceManual:5.6:pm.6
5.6- 12E
Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.6 I/O (Main) (13/19)

MAIN 1: OUTPUT 9

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 PO323 Programable output (323). 0


01 PO324 Programable output (324). 0
02 PO325 Programable output (325). 0
03 PO326 Programable output (326). 0
04 PO327 Programable output (327). 0
05 PO328 Programable output (328). 0
06 PO329 Programable output (329). 0
07 PO330 Programable output (330). 0
08 PO333 Programable output (333). 0
09 PO334 Programable output (334). 0
0A PO335 Programable output (335). 0
0B PO336 Programable output (336). 0
0C PO337 Programable output (337). 0
0D PO338 Programable output (338). 0
0E PO339 Programable output (339). 0
0F PO340 Programable output (340). 0

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A.MaintenanceManual:5.6:pm.6
5.6- 13E
Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.6 I/O (Main) (14/19)

MAIN 2: OUTPUT 1

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 CRCER1 CRC Error 1 0


01 PCTTOER1 Time Over 1 0
02 CRCER2 CRC Error 2 0
03 PCTTOER2 Time Over 2 0
04 CRCER3 CRC Error 3 0
05 PCTTOER3 Time Over 3 0
06 CRCER4 CRC Error 4 0
07 PCTTOER4 Time Over 4 0
08 CRCER5 CRC Error 5 0
09 PCTTOER5 Time Over 5 0
0A CRCER6 CRC Error 6 0
0B PCTTOER6 Time Over 6 0
0C CRCER7 CRC Error 7 0
0D PCTTOER7 Time Over 7 0
0E CRCER8 CRC Error 8 0
0F PCTTOER8 Time Over 8 0

MAIN 2: OUTPUT 2

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 SLVON 1 0
01 SLVON 2 0
02 SLVON 3 0
03 SLVON 4 0
04 SLVON 5 0
05 SLVON 6 0
06 SLVON 7 0
07 SLVON 8 0
08 0
09 0
0A 0
0B 0
0C PC9 AUX Port Input PC9 0
0D PC13 AUX Port Input PC13 0
0E PC14 AUX Port Input PC14 0
0F PC15 AUX Port Input PC15 0

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A.MaintenanceManual:5.6:pm.6
5.6- 14E
Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.6 I/O (Main) (15/19)

MAIN 2: OUTPUT 3

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 0
01 0
02 0
03 0
04 0
05 0
06 0
07 0
08 0
09 0
0A 0
0B 0
0C 0
0D 0
0E COMHOLT Communication Error 0
Disturb Forbid
0F IRQDEN Communication Stop 0

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A.MaintenanceManual:5.6:pm.6
5.6- 15E
Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.7 I/O (Slave) (1/3)

SLAVE 1: INPUT 1

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 DIPSW0S DIPSW 0. 0
01 DIPSW1S DIPSW 1. 0
02 DIPSW2S DIPSW 2. 0
03 DIPSW3S DIPSW 3. 0
04 SVERX X axis Servo error. 0
05 SVERY Y axis Servo error. 0
06 SVERZ Z axis Servo error. 0
07 SVERU U axis Servo error. 0
08 SVERV V axis Servo error. 0
09 SVERB B axis Servo error. 0
0A *BYFSS *Flash memory busy signal. 1
0B SVRDY Servo driver ready. 1
0C PN15ER ±15V power error. 0
0D XSCE X linear scale error. 0
0E YSCE Y linear scale error. 0
0F RSVIN1S Inputreverse 0
(CPLDconnect)

SLAVE 1: INPUT 2
No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 VERTU Edge sense interrupt (upper) 0


lach.
01 VERTL Edge sense interrupt (lower) 0
lach.
02 CPUERW CPU wire error. 0
03 Input reserve. 0
04 Input reserve. 0
05 Input reserve. 0
06 Input reserve. 0
07 Input reserve. 0
08 0
09 0
0A 0
0B 0
0C 0
0D 0
0E 0
0F 0

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A.MaintenanceManual:5.7.pm.6
5.7- 1E
Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.7 I/O (Slave) (2/3)

SLAVE 1: OUTPUT 1

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 SHSELX X axis speed command -


sample hold.
01 SHSELY Y axis speed command -
sample hold.
02 SHSELZ Z axis speed command -
sample hold.
03 SHSELU U axis speed command -
sample hold.
04 SHSELV V axis speed command -
sample hold.
05 SHSELB B axis speed command -
sample hold.
06 SHTRIG Sample hold pulse. 0
07 SVON Servo on. 1
08 LED1S LED1. -
09 LED2S LED2. 1
0A LED3S LED3. 1
0B LED4S LED4. 1
0C NMIGATES NMI gate. 1
0D 0
0E PROTECTS Soft protect. 0
0F BOPOUT B axis equipped. 0

SLAVE 1: OUTPUT 2

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 VMODU Edge sense interrupt 0


(upper) lach valid.
01 VMODL Edge sense interrupt 0
(lower) lach valid.
02 VMODT Edge sense interrupt 0
lach valid.
03 RSVOUT1S Out put reverse 0
(CPLD connect).
04 CHECK1S Out put board check 1. 0
05 CHECK2S Out put board check 2. 0
06 ZDWN-UP Z axis down 0
07 Out put reserve. 0
08 0
09 0
0A 0
0B 0
0C 0
0D 0
0E 0
0F 0

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A.MaintenanceManual:5.7.pm.6
5.7- 2E
Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.8 I/O (Local) (1/3)

Local: INPUT 1

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 CPUERM CPU error(main). 0 “1” when error occurred in main CPU.


01 CPUERS CPU error(slave). 0 “1” when error occurred in slave CPU.
02
03 EXPANDLCH Program area selection 0 1: Standard 0: Three times larger.
04 *HARDP *Hard protect. 1 “0” when protect ON is selected.

05 *BYFSL *Local flash busy signal. 1 Local flash memory busy signal.
06 *DSRA *Data set ready A. 1 RS-232C deta set ready signal
07 *DSRB *Data set ready B. 1 Spare communication port data set ready
signal.
08 DIPSW0L DIPSW Input local 0. 0 1 bit of NC board SW1. “0” when dip
switch is ON. (display language selec-
tion)
09 DIPSW1L DIPSW Input local 1. 0 2bit of NC board SW1.
“0” when dip switch is ON.
(display language selection)
0A DIPSW2L DIPSW Input local 2. 0 3 bit of NC board SW1. “0” when dip
switch is ON.
0B DIPSW3L DIPSW Input local 3. 0 4 bit of NC board SW1. “0” when dip
switch is ON.
0C IRSV1L Input Reserve 1. 1
0D IRSV2L Input Reserve 2. 1
0E IRSV3L Input Reserve 3. 1
0F IRSV4L Input Reserve 4. 1

Local: INPUT 2
No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 0
01 0
02 0
03 0
04 0
05 0
06 0
07 0
08 0
09 0
0A 0
0B 0
0C 0
0D 0
0E 0
0F Communication stop key 0

1999-12-28 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual 5.8.pm6


5.8.- 1E
Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.8 I/O (Local) (2/3)

Local: OUTPUT 1

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 INTOKL Interrupt permission 1 Local CPU interrupt permission signal.


signal (local)
01 *SFTPWRL *Soft protect on (local) 0 Local RAM soft protect signal.
02 ORSV0L Spare output local 0. 0
03 LCDPWON Liquid crystal power ON 1 Liquid crystal power ON/OFF signal.
signal.
04 *LED1L *LED display local 1. 1 NC board LED1. Lights when correspond-
ing port is “0”.
05 *LED2L *LED display local 2. 1 NC board LED2. Lights when correspond-
ing port is “0”.
06 *LED3L *LED display local 3. 1 NC board LED3. Lights when correspond-
ing port is “0”.
07 *LED4L *LED display local 4. - NC board LED4. Lights when correspond-
ing port is “0”. Normal toggle.
08 *SFTPL *Soft protect on(share) 0 Common RAM soft protect signal.
09 *NMIGATEL *NMI gate. 1 Gate signal of NMI signal.
0A *MASK *Display mask signal. 1 Liquid crystal display indication ON/OFF
signal.
0B *DIMASK * Display timing control 0 Screen selection timing control signal.
signal.
0C CPUERL CPU error(local). 0 Local CPU watch dog error.
0D ERA Port terminal ready A. 1 RS-232C terminal ready A.
0E ERB Port terminal ready B. 0 Spare communication port terminal ready B.
0F ATCHG Attribute Change 0

1999-12-28 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual 5.8.pm6


5.8.- 2E
Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.9 I/O (Wire) (1/10)

WIRE1: INPUT 1

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 DIPSW0W DIP switch 0. 0


01 DIPSW1W DIP switch 1. 0
02 DIPSW2W DIP switch 2. 0
03 DIPSW3W DIP switch 3. 0
04 CPUERS CPU error slave. 0
05 RSVIN1W Input reserve 1. 0
06 DSRTNA Discharge pulse feed back. 1
07 0
08 0
09 0
0A 0
0B 0
0C 0
0D 0
0E 0
0F 0

WIRE1: INPUT 2

No. SYMBOL NAME DEFAULT FUNCTION

00 0
01 *LS6 *Water level detect 3(water tank). 0
02 0
03 *LS4 *Water level detect 1 1 (tank flow switch).
04 CCW Tension brake rotate direction 0 (L:roll, H:feed).
05 *LS2 *Guide motor LS2. 1
06 *LS1 *Guide motor zero point LS1. 0
07 *K1 *Wire detect 1. 1
08 *K2 *Waste wire capacity over1. 1
09 RSVIN2 Reserve input connection. 1
0A TH Tank thermal. 0
0B TALM Wire tank power error. 0
0C TWD Speed control driver 0 (L:external, H:internal).
0D MCCW Pretension motor rotate direction 0 (L: roll, H:feed)
0E WTLS Toruque switch . 0 Not in use.
0F *INVER *Inverter error. 1

1999-12-27
5.9- 1E MO:89.HS-50A.MaintenanceManual:5.9:pm.6
Chapter5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.10 Display Inspection

This function is used to check missing dots on the screen.

1) Press the [I/O] key to display the <INPUT/OUTPUT MENU> screen. Select
[1.INPUT/OUTPUT].
2) Press the [PAGE UP] or [PAGE DOWN] key to display the version screen.
3) Move the cursor to [DISPLAY TEST].
4) Press the [1] and [EOB/ENT] keys.
5) Testing the display is commenced.
6) Press any key to stop testing and the screen returns to the normal display.

1999-12-24 HS-50A Maintenance manual 5.10.pm6


5.10 - 1E
Chapter5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.11 Special power-ON (1/2)

1. Special power-ON 1 (key check mode)


This is used to check keys.

1) Press the [POWER] switch while holding down the [EMERGENCY], [HOLD], and
[RELSE] keys.
2) The system boots in key check mode.
All keys are invalid after the <Key Check> screen has appeared from the
<INPUT/OUTPUT MENU> screen.
3) Press the [RST] key to return to normal key operation.

2. Special power-ON 2 (clearing all memory)


This is used when power on can not be operated due to defectives in the file
(machine parameter, user parameter, etc.).

1) Set the [PROTECT] switch to [OFF].


2) Press the [POWER] switch while holding down the [EMERGENCY], [RELSE],
and [SHIFT] keys.
3) Keep the [+Z/B] key held down for at least three seconds when instructed on
the screen, and all memory is cleared.
4) After clearing all memory, turn power off.
5) Turn power on.
6) Format the memory.
7) Turn power off.

1999-12-27 HS-50A Maintenance manual 5.11.pm6


5.11 - 1E
Chapter5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.11 Special power-ON (2/2)

Notes
(1) When all memory is cleared, the adjusted value for the screen contrast is also
cleared, thus the contrast needs to be adjusted when power is turned on next.
Press the [I/O] key to display the <INPUT/OUTPUT MENU> screen. Contrast
can be adjusted using the [PAGE UP] or [PAGE DOWN] key.
(2) The steps for formatting memory are as below.

1. Set the [PROTECT] switch to [OFF].


2. Press the [EDIT] key.
3. Press the [I/O] key to display the <INPUT/OUTPUT MENU> screen.
Select [1. INPUT/OUTPUT].
4. Press the [PAGE UP] or [PAGE DOWN] key to display the version screen.
5. Move the cursor to [PARAMETER CHANGE].
6. Press the [1] and [EOB/ENT] keys.
7. Press the [PRGRM] key to display the <PROGRAM EDIT MENU> screen.
8. Press the [2] and [EOB/ENT] keys or move the cursor to [DIRECTORY
OF MEMORY] and press the [EOB/ENT] key.
9. Press the [F4] key on the <DIRECTORY OF MEMORY MENU> screen.
10. When instructed on the screen, press the [DEL] key.
11. The memory format confirmation screen appears. To proceed, press the
[F0] key.
12. Confirm that formatting memory has been completed and turn power off.

Note ) When [PARAMETER CHANGE] is set to [YES], attempting to press the


[RST] key or change mode changes the setting to [NO].

1999-12-27 HS-50A Maintenance manual 5.11.pm6


5.11 - 2E
Chapter5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.12 Hidden Operation (1/3)

1. Hidden operation 1 (changing hidden parameter - [ACCURACY


MEASUREMENT])

1) Set the [PROTECT] switch to [OFF].


2) Press the [DATA BANK] key to display the <DATA BANK MENU> screen.
3) Press the [-], [9], [9], [9], [9], and [EOB/ENT] keys.
4) Set the required items.
5) Press the [F0] key.

DATA BANK

•TEST (0: NONE 1:ACCURACY 2: DISCHARGE) ...... 5

•SAMPLING INTERVAL................................................................................................... 0

•SELECT 1 (0: NO 1:X 2:Y 3:Z............................................................... 0


4:U 5:V 6:B)
•SELECT 2 (0: NO 1:X 2:Y 3:Z............................................................... 0
4:U 5:V 6:B)
•SELECT 3 (0: NO 1:X 2:Y 3:Z........................................................... ... 0
4:U 5:V 6:B)
•SELECT 4 (0: NO 1:X 2:Y 3:Z........................................................... ... 0
4:U 5:V 6:B)

TEST _

DATA
BANK
MENU
F0 F1 F2 F3 F4

1999-12-27 HS-50A Maintenance manual .5.12.pm6


5.12 - 1E
Chapter5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.12 Hidden Operation (2/3)

2. Hidden operation 2 (deleting [POWER ONTIME],[TIME OF POWER SUPPLY]


[RUNNING TIME], [ALARM LOG], and [OPERATION LOG] )

1) Set the [PROTECT] switch to [OFF].


2) Press the [I/O] key to display the <INPUT/OUTPUT MENU> screen.
3) Press the [-], [9], [9], [9], [9], and [EOB/ENT] keys.
4) Set the required items.
5) Press the [F0] key.

I/O

•POWER ON TIME ...... 00251:22:15

•RUNNING TIME ...... 00080:32:20

• TIME OF POWER SUPPLY ...... 00243:32:20

•DELETE ALARM LOG (1: YES) ......

•DELETE OPERATION LOG (1: YES) ......

POWER ON TIME _

I/O
MENU

F0 F1 F2 F3 F4

1999-12-27 HS-50A Maintenance manual .5.12.pm6


5.12 - 2E
Chapter5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.12 Hidden Operation (3/3)


3. Hidden Operation 3 (changing the soft switch)

1) Set the [PROTECT] switch to [OFF].


2) Press the [I/O] key to display the <INPUT/OUTPUT MENU> screen.
3) Press the [-], [9], [9], [9], [8], and [EOB/ENT] keys.
4) Set the required items.
5) Press the [F0] key.

SOFT SWITCH INPUT/OUTPUT

•SWITCH 1 00000000

•SWITCH 2 00000000

•SWITCH 3 00000000

•SWITCH 4 00000000

•SWITCH 5 00000000

•SWITCH 6 00000000

•SWITCH 7 00000000

•SWITCH 8 00000000

•SWITCH 9 00000000

•SWITCH 10 00000000

SWITCH 1 00000000

I/O
MENU
F0 F1 F2 F3 F4

1999-12-27 HS-50A Maintenance manual .5.12.pm6


5.12 - 3E
Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.13 Powder Break Warm Up Operation

The program for the powder break warm up operation is PROGRAM1010 at the
shipment.
After repeating the motion A and B which are indicated in the table below, alter-
nately 10 times, the motion C is executed to complete the operation.

(PROGRAM1010)
(NARASHI)
G210I12J0
M582
#1=0
WHILE [#1 LT 10] DO 1
G210I12J0
G04X5.0
G210I12J7
G041X10.
#1=#1+1
END1
G210I12J7
G04X480.0
M02

Motion Wire Feed Rate Wire Tension RunningTime


A 12 0 5 sec.

B 12 7 10 sec.

C 12 7 480 sec.

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A.MaintenanceManual:5.13:pm.6
5.13- 1E
Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc HS-50A

5.14 Energy Compensation

Compensate the energy so that the relation between command value and feed rate
can be obtained as shown in the table below under the following conditions;

Material: SKD-11
Workpiece thickness: 50mm
Wire electrode:S-25H
Spark cycle:15µ S
Wire feed rate:18
Wire tension:5
Target gap voltage:40V
Water conductivity: 3
Watertemperature:25C°
S-autocontrol:ON
T-autocontrol:ON
Upper nozzle and workpiece upper surface distance:0.05- 0.10mm
Lower nozzle and workpiece lower surface distance:0.05-0.10mm
Upper/Lower nozzle flux control valve: Full Open
(Flow rate of3 to 4 L/min , for both upper/lower nozzles.)

Feed rate
CommandValue (mm/min)
3 0.12
4 0.20
5 0.30
6 0.44
7 0.64
8 0.94
9 1.27
10 1.44
11 1.62
12 1.79
13 1.97
14 2.14
15 2.32
16 2.50
17 2.67
18 3.00

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A.MaintenanceManual:5.14:pm.6
5.14- 1E
Chapter 5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc HS-50A

5.15 Motion Check

Motion of actuators can be checked on the <MOTION CHECK> screen.


On this screen, actuators can be turned on and off individually to check if each
actuator works correctly. Checking method is explained below.

1. Press the [I/O] key to display <I/O> screen. See below.

2. Press the [5. MOTION CHECK] to display the <MOTION CHECK> screen.
See below.

MOTION CHECK INPUT / OUTPUT

MOTION CHECK· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · OFF

WIRE DRIVE , CUT MOTER· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · OFF


JET VALVE · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · OFF
WATER VALVE · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · OFF
DRAIN VALVE · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · OFF
FLUSHING VALVE · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · OFF
DEIONIZE VALVE · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · OFF
PUMP· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · OFF
TENSION BRAKE· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · OFF
PRETENSION, BRAKE· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · OFF
CUT WIRE POWER· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · OFF
R - SOL.(ELECTRODE)· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · OFF
R - SOL.(PINCH ROL)· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · OFF
WIRE FEED MOTOR 1 CW· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · OFF
WIRE FEED MOTOR 2 CW· · · · · · · · · · ·· · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · OFF
DIREC. CHANGE MOTOR · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · · OFF

I/O ON OFF
MENU

F0 F1 F2 F3 F4

3 .Locate the cursor to “MOTION CHECK” at the top of the screen and press
the [F1] key to turn on the motion check. When the motion check mode is on,
actuators can be turned on ad off individually. However, the motion check can not be
set while program operation is performed or other operating modes are used.

4. Locate the cursor to the desired actuator and press the [F1] key .
The selected actuator is turned on. To turn off, press the [F2] key.

5. To end the motion check, press the [F0] key .


Then, the motion check and actuator are all turned off.
Also, motion check is automatically turned off by pressing the [RST] key,
switching modes or pressing the [HOLD] key

1999-12-27 MO:89.HS-50A.MaintenanceManual:5.15:pm.6
5.15- 1E
Chapter5 Diagnosis by NC unit, etc. HS-50A

5.16 PCB Sticker


1. Memory PCB version sticker
A10- NJ ??
00 - 99 : Indicates the version (last two digits of the part
code)
(e.g.) “A10-NJ01” indicates that the PCB is version 01.

2. Software version

Main Local Slave Wire


NC MA1-61-?? LA1-61-?? SA1-61-?? WA1-61-??

Note: The last two digits indicate the software version.

3. Example of memory PCB version sticker and software version No.

A10-NJ??
Memory Main Local Slave Wire
PCB
A10-NJ01 MA1-61-01 LA1-61-01 SA1-61-01 WA1-61-01
A10-NJ02 MA1-61-02 LA1-61-02 UP UP
A10-NJ03 MA1-61-03 UP UP UP
A10-NJ04 MA1-61-04 LA1-61-03 SA1-61-02 UP
A10-NJ05 MA1-61-05 LA1-61-04 SA1-61-03 WA1-61-02

1999-12-27 HS-50A Maintenance manual 5.16:.pm6


5.16 - 1E
Chapter5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc HS-50A

5.17 Dip Switch

MAIN/LOCAL

M/L Bit Function Content


Main 1 Not in use ON
2 Change of data/command cache ON:Valid (Normal)
OFF:Invalid
3 Not in use ON
4 (FLASH writing) ON: Normal
OFF: Write mode
Local 5 Language selection Bit 6 Bit 5
ON ON: Japanese
ON OFF: English
6 OFF ON: German
OFF OFF: Not in use
7 Not in use ON
8 (FLASH writing) ON: Normal
OFF: Write mode

SLAVE/ WIRE

S/W Bit Function Content


Slave 1 Booting CPU/ICE ON:Booting by CPU
OFF:Booting by ICE
2 Not in use ON
3 (Booting slave only) ON:Normal
(For FLASH check) OFF:Booting slave only
4 (FLASH writing) ON:Normal
OFF:Write mode
Wire 5 Not in use ON
6 Not in use ON
7 Not in use ON
8 Not in use ON

1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual 5.17.pm.6


5.17 - 1E
Chapter5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.18 Soft Switch (1/2)

<SWITCH 1>

Bit Function Content


1 Not in use 0
2 Not in use 0
3 Not in use 0
4 Not in use 0
5 Not in use 0
6 Not in use 0
7 Not in use 0
8 Not in use 0

<SWITCH 2>

Bit Function Content


1 Not in use 0
2 Main/slave command check 0:Check
1: Does not check (for debugging)
3 C-phase check mode 0: Mode 1
1: Mode 0
4 Encoder check 0:Check (new amplifier)
1: Does not check (old amplifier)
5 Not in use 0
6 Not in use 0
7 Not in use 0
8 Not in use 0

<SWITCH 3>

Bit Function Content


1 X axis motor detahment mode 0:Motor not detached
1:Motor detached
2 Y axis motor detahment mode 0:Motor not detached
1:Motor detached
3 Z axis motor detahment mode 0:Motor not detached
1:Motor detached
4 U axis motor detahment mode 0:Motor not detached
1:Motor detached
5 V axis motor detahment mode 0:Motor not detached
1:Motor detached
6 B axis motor detahment mode 0:Motor not detached
1:Motor detached
7 Not in use 0
8 DA offset 0:Valid
1:Invalid
1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual 5.18.pm.6
5.18 - 1E
Chapter5 Diagnosis by NC unit,etc. HS-50A

5.18 Soft Switch (2/2)


<SWITCH4>
Bit Function Content
1 Position screen display mode 0:Normal
1:Debug
2 Not in use 0
3 Not in use 0
4 Not in use 0
5 Not in use 0
6 Not in use 0
7 Powder brake detached 0: Powder brake not detached
Soft in valid 1:Powder brake detached
8 Wire control detached 0:Wire control not detached
Soft in valid 1: Wire control detached

Note: Input DEB01 in the I/O menu and all position screen display mode are set
for the debug.
Switches 5 to 8 are not used (0).
<SWITCH 9>
Bit Function Content
1 Short circuit prevention (for debug) 0:Invalid
Wire breakage mode 1:Valid
2 Wire discharge mode 0:Invalid
(for corner control debug) 1:Valid
3 Wire discharge mode 0:Invalid
(for section control debug) 1:Valid
4 Wire discharge mode 0:Invalid
(for debug) 1:Valid
5 Not in use 0
6 Not in use 0
7 Not in use 0
8 Not in use 0
<SWITCH 10>

Bit Function Content


1 Not in use 0
2 Not in use 0
3 Not in use 0
4 Not in use 0
5 Not in use 0
6 Not in use 0
7 Energy correction value measurement 0:Normal
1:Energy correction
value measurement
8 Parameter overwirte protection 0:ON
1:OFF (can be
overwritten anytime)
1999-12-24 MO:89.HS-50A Maintenance manual 5.18.pm.6
5.18 - 2E
Chapter6 Water Flow System

1999-11-07 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual contents:pm.6


Chapter6- 1E
Chapter7 Parts list

1999-11-07 MO89:HS-50A Maintenance manual contents:pm.6


Chapter7- 1E
Chapter8 Appendix HS-50A

Chapter 8 APPENDIX

APPENDIX 1 TOOL AND MEASURING EQUIPMENT LIST

1. TOOL LIST

2. MEASURING EQUIPMENT LIST

3. LUBRICATING OIL LIST

APPENDIX 2 EXPENDABLES AND QUASI-EXPEND


ABLES LIST

1. DEFINITION

2. EXPENDABLES LIST

3. QUASI-EXPENDABLES LIST

1999-09-16
Chapter 8 - 1E MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual 8.pm6
Chapter8 Appendix HS-50A

APPENDIX 1 TOOL AND MEASURING INSTRUMENT LIST


1. TOOL LIST
Phillips screwdriver (+) (medium)
Phillips screwdriver (+) (small)
Regular screwdriver (•|) (medium)
Regular screwdriver (•|) (small)
Socket-screw hexagonal wrench, nominal size 0.9
Socket-screw hexagonal wrench, nominal size 1.5
Socket-screw hexagonal wrench, nominal size 2
Socket-screw hexagonal wrench, nominal size 2.5
Socket-screw hexagonal wrench, nominal size 3
Socket-screw hexagonal wrench, nominal size 4
Socket-screw hexagonal wrench, nominal size 5
Socket-screw hexagonal wrench, nominal size 6
Socket-screw hexagonal wrench, nominal size 8
Spanner, nominal size 5.5
Spanner, nominal size 7
Spanner, nominal size 8
Spanner, nominal size 9
Spanner, nominal size 10
Spanner, nominal size 12
Spanner, nominal size 13
Spanner, nominal size 14
Spanner, nominal size 17
Spanner, nominal size 18
Spanner, nominal size 19
Spanner, nominal size 20
Spanner, nominal size 22
Spanner, nominal size 23
Spanner, nominal size 24
Spanner, nominal size 27
Spanner, nominal size 29
Adjustable angel wrench, size 50 mm
Long nose pliers
Cutting nipper, nominal size 150
Pliers, nominal size 150
Pipe wrench, nominal size 300
Plastic hammer
Tweezers
C-shaped snap ring attaching/detaching tool
Hand brush
Gloves (working gloves)
Cleaning alcohol (200 cc)
Cloth (waste cloth)
Seal tape (5 m)
Grease gun
ADHSIVE "ROCK-TIGHT 222 (Nippon ROCK-TIGHT)" or equivalent

1999-09-16
Chapter 8 - 2E MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual 8.pm6
Chapter8 Appendix HS-50A

Hose band φ90 (for pump maintenance)


Hose band φ115 (for pump maintenance)
Stand
IC remover
IC inserting tool
Fine U nut exclusive tie tool nominal size 0.1
Fine U nut M8 × 0.75 tie jig

2. MEASURING EQUIPMENT LIST

Multi-meter (analog type)


Push-pull gage (which can measure force of 3 kgf or larger)
Dial gauge
Small magnetic stand
Square scale C class 1 150mm
Height presetter
XY axes home position alignment jig

3. LUBRICATING OIL LIST

Use the lubricating oils as below for linear guides, ball screws, and gears of cross-table (X
and Y axes), Z axis, taper cutting unit (U and V axes), and B-axis indexing unit.

Manufacture Name Number (type)

NISSEKI Multinock #2

SHOWA SHELL Alvania No.2

MOBIL Mobilux No.2

ESSO Beacon 2

MITUBISHI Multi-purpose #2

IDEMITU Daphne Coronex No.2

COSMO Dynamax 2

1999-09-16
Chapter 8 - 3E MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual 8.pm6
Chapter8 Appendix HS-50A

APPENDIX 2 EXPENDABLES AND QUASI-EXPEND


ABLES LIST

1. DEFINITION

Expendables: Parts which performance deteriorate in proportion to machining time and


need replacing normally within one year (supposing the machining time is 400
hours per month).

Quasi-expendables: Parts other than the expendables, which deteriorate in proportion to


machining time and are easily damaged by erroneous usage.

2. EXPENDABLES LIST
Mechanical Parts
Parts Name Parts Code Qty Remarks

WIRE :S-10H5KG 634515001 1


WIRE:S-15H1.6KG 634516001 1
WIRE:S-20H5KG 634251001 1
WIRE:S-25H5KG 634252000 1
WIRE :S-30H5KG 634518001 1
WIRE GUIDE STD 0.1 632984000 1
WIRE GUIDE STD 0.15 632985000 1
WIRE GUIDE STD 0.2 632986000 1
WIRE GUIDE STD 0.25 632987000 1
WIRE GUIDE STD 0.3 632988000 1
WIRE GUIDEATU0.2#1 659089001 1 *1
WIRE GUIDE ATL0.25#1 659090001 1 *1
WIRE GUIDE ATL0.3#1 659342001 1 *1
WIRE GUIDE ATL0.2 632992000 1 *1
WIRE GUIDE ATL0.25 632993000 1 *1
WIRE GUIDE ATL0.3 632994000 1 *1
TELESCOPIC PIPE GUIDE ASSY 659069001 1
SUB WIRE GUIDE A 659377001 1
BRUSH R80 632904000 2
CHIP:SNGA120408 634231000 2
WIRE CLEANERA ASSY 634207001 2
WIRE CLEANER B ASSY 630551001 2
FILTERD300L500 634062001 2
ION EXCHANGE RESIN,7.5L 659363001 1
ADDICTIVE LIQUID SET 630703001 1 *1
CHIP; RNMG1906 632803000 2 *1
MECHANICAL SEAL KIT V04 634886001 1
MECHANICAL SEAL KIT V22 634891001 1
BATTERY :LR-6 645506001 3

1999-09-16
Chapter 8 - 4E MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual 8.pm6
Chapter8 Appendix HS-50A

3. QUASI-EXPENDABLES LIST (1/2)

Parts Name Parts Code Qty Remarks

MOTOR, 14.5W ASSY 659234001 2


MOTOR, 49.3W ASSY 659236001 1
MOTOR, 57.0W ASSY 659238001 2
BALL SCREW L558 ASSY 634730001 1
BALL SCREW L408 ASSY 632953001 1
BALL SCREW L308 632950000 1
BALL SCREW L160 659042001 2
SLIDE SEAL BASE L 634757001 2
SLIDE SEAL BASE S 634758001 2
SLIDE SEAL GUIDE L 634764001 2
SLIDE SEAL GUIDE S 634765001 2
SLIDE SEAL 634766001 1
ROD SEAL PACKING 634769001 1
DOOR PACKING L1335 659308001 1
DOOR PACKING L765 659309001 1
PACKINGD57 659300001 1
FLOAT SWITCH D30 ASSY 634466001 1
PULLEY, D42-L16 659246001 2
PULLEY,D48 634181000 1
POWDER BREAK, 10K 634196000 1
URETHANE ROLLER, D70 634522001 1
RING D50 634214000 1
MINIATURE BEARING 8 530138001 2
SEPARATOR0.5 659024001 2
DRIVE ROLLER D50SN 634637001 2
BALL BEARING , RADIAL 6900ZZ 076900800 2
WIRE CHOPPING GUIDE N 659400001 1
RUBBER PACKING L35 659358001 3
JET NOZZLE, D1.3#1 659091001 1 *1
UPPER NOZZLE, 1506 632902000 1
ORING, S32 081032870 1
LOCK NUT M36 634487000 1
LOWER NOZZLE STD1506 632920000 1
LOWER NOZZLE, AT1506 659398000 1 *1
NOZZLE STOPPER 632921000 1
WIRE TURN GUIDE 632997001 1
WIRE APPROACH, D15-2 632919001 1
GUIDE ROLLER D30 632922000 1
BALL BEARING RADIAL 533532001 2
LOWER ARM COVER D70 634534001 1
GND CABLE L ASSY 634753001 2
GND CABLE ASSY L830 659179001 2
LEVEL SENSOR OLH-10 659325001 1
WIRE INTAKE GUIDE 634552001 1 *1

1999-09-16
Chapter 8 - 5E MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual 8.pm6
Chapter8 Appendix HS-50A

3. QUASI-EXPENDABLES LIST (2/2)

Parts Name Parts Code Qty Remarks


DRIVE ROLLER, D20 634004000 1 *1
PINCH ROLLER, D20 634007000 1 *1
DRIVE ROLLER D20M1Z20 634573001 1 *1
PINCH ROLLER, D20M1Z20 634574001 1 *1
OIL SEAL:AC2066EO 632851000 1 *2
OIL RING G65 081065770 1 *2
O RING G85 081085770 1 *2
BRUSH, 8X16R27 632855000 2 *2
BRUSH BLOCK D54 634109000 1 *2

*1: Applies only to A.W.T. machine (optional).


*2: Applies only when B-axis index table (optional) is installed.

1999-09-16
Chapter 8 - 6E MO89:HS-50A.Maintenancemanual 8.pm6

Das könnte Ihnen auch gefallen